推荐第1篇：初中全英说课稿
初中全英说课稿1
Good morning, everyone!
Today, I’ll say something about Unit 9 Part A in Book 4 of Oxford English.
Background on the reformation of curriculum, this book can connect the life and act, emphasize the interest and experience of the Ss, the pictures are active and vivid.Grade four is the initial stage of English learning, so it strees on the emotion of the Ss, creates a well beginning for the Ss.
This Unit has 7 parts, we’ll learn Part A mainly, it embodies the repeating characterize.Review the learned language points \"Where’s…\"and the new language points will be represented in the following units.So this unit forms connecting links with a special meaning in this book.
The content of this period is to use \"Where’sare…\" to determine the place.And according to the contents and the fact of the Ss, I establish the following three teaching aims of this period:
The first one: students can listen, read, say and spell the following words: a gla, a fridge, an egg, bread and a table.
The second one: students can listen, read, say and write the following daily expreions: What’s for breakfast?
Have some juice then.
The third one: students can listen, read, say and write the following sentence patterns: Where’sWhere are themy…
It’s They’re…
There’s no …in on ear…
I think the most difficult point of this period is to make sure the students can use the patterns \"Where’sWhere are…and There is no …inon ear…\" in their daily life correctly.
And I will use some pictures, words and sentence cards, a tape recorder and the multi-media computer to help me achieve the aims.
The task-based method, communicated method, group cooperate method will be used in this period.
To accomplish the aims, I design the following steps:
Step 1 Songs and the game arousers the emotion.
In order to attract the Ss’ attention and construct an atmosphere of learning English, I let the students sing some English songs and play the game \"Simon says\".At the same time the game can review the prep, serve the knowledge as foil and consist the appearance of the knowledge.
Step 2 Change cla to life, happy to say.
The substance of language is communication and the environment of communication is life.So when I present the sentence pattern \"What’s for breakfast?\" I first show a clock to elicit the time for breakfast, teach the sentence.
Then show my own photo of having breakfast, Ss ask and gue.In this way I can attract Ss’ attention, encourage Ss to ask Qs with the new knowledge.
Most of the Ss have learnt the sentence pattern: Where’s…？ so I design a task for Ss to help Helen find the food and drinks for breakfast, and teach the new language points: Where are…？ They’re … Meanwhile stick the sentences on the Bb.
After some practice by asking and answering, I present the next language points:
There’s no …inon ear…
Have …then.
And I will stick these sentence patterns on the Bb.Finally I’ll let the Ss do pair works to consolidate them.
Step 3 Listen to the tape and Ss imitate to read and say.
As the new reformation of curriculum, emphasized the traditional cla attach importance to the mechanical teaching, neglect the experience and participation, for example, the five-step method.So in this leon, after presentation, I ask Ss to listen to the tape with three Qs, read in different roles and in pairs, then try to recite the text.
Step 4 Ss be the main body, T makes a guider.
In cla, Ss play as a host, and the T makes an influence on guiding, help Ss to act the learnt dialogue, it can stre the position of the Ss, and arouse their interest.
Then I show a carton with no voice, ask Ss to make a dialogue in pairs.
There are lots of ways to consolidate the new knowledge.
Playing game is a good way.So according to the physiology of Ss, I hold a group competition during the game, ask Ss to finish the blanks.In this way can develop Ss’ good habits and achieve the aim of mastering the learned knowledge in situation.
Step 5 Change cla to life, learn by themselves.
Is this the end of the cla? I don’t think so.If there is an end, I think it should be in the life.So I extend this cla, encourage Ss to use the learned to communicate with each other in their life.
In a word, the whole period is based on tasks, which are designed from easy steps to steps that are challenging.When the Ss are carting out the tasks, they can acquire information, knowledge, and have their ability and skills trained.
That’s all.Thanks a lot for your attention.
初中全英说课稿2Interpretation
Good morning, ladies and gentlemen.It’s my great honor and pleasure to be here sharing my leon with you.
I have been ready to begin this representation with five parts.
Analysis of the teaching material, the teaching aims, the important and difficult points, the studying methods, and the teaching procedure.
Part 1 Teaching Material
The content of my leon is New Senior English for China Book*** Unit********************.This unit is about******************** （topics）。 By studying of this unit, we’ll enable students to know************************* and develop the interest in*******************.At the same time, let the students learn how to******************** （functional items）。 From this leon, it starts***************************（structures）。 （As we all know, reading belongs to the input during the proce of the language learning.The input has great effect on output, such as speaking and writing.） Therefore, this leon is in the important position of this unit.If the Ss can master it well, it will be helpful for them to learn the rest of this unit.
Part 2 Teaching Aims
According to the new standard curriculum and the syllabus （新课程标准和教学大纲）， and after studying the teaching material, the teaching aims are the followings:
1.Knowledge objects （语言目标：语音，词汇，语法，功能，话题）
（1）The Ss can master the usage of the important words and expreions.
（2）The Ss can use the ****************** （grammar） in the proper situation.
（3）The Ss can understand the content of the leon, talk about *********************** （information） and get their own idea about *******************************.
2.Ability objects （技能目标：听，说，读，写）
（1） To develop the Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading and writing
（2） To guide Ss to set up effective studying strategies.
（3） To improve the student’s reading ability, especially their skimming and scanning ability.
（4） To train the Ss’ abilities of studying by themselves and cooperating .
3.Emotion or moral objects （情感目标：兴趣，自信，合作，爱国，国际视野）
（1）By completing the task, the Ss increase their interest in ********************and set up self-confidence in *********************.
（2）Teach the Ss*************************, put the moral education in the language study.
Part 3 the Important and Difficult Points
Based on the requirement of the syllabus.
The important points are************************** such as **************.
The difficult points are************************* for example*************.
Part 4 Teaching Methods
As is known to us all, a good teaching method requires that the teacher should help Ss develop good sense of the English language.
For achieving these teaching aims, （after the analysis of the teaching material and teaching aims,） I will use the following methods according to the modern social communication teaching theories（现代社会交际教学理论） .
1.Communicative Approach（交际教学法）
2.Whole Language Teaching（整体语言教学法）
3.Task-based Language Teaching （任务教学法）
4.Total Situational Action （情景教学） a \"scene — activity\" teaching method , it establishes a real scene and the interaction between the teacher and the Ss.At the same time, CAI （电脑辅助教学） can provide a real situation with its sound and picture, it can develop the Ss creativity in learning English.
Part 5 Teaching Procedure
Step 1.Lead-in.（*****min）
*******************************************************************
Purpose of my design: （1） to catch Ss’ attention about the cla/topic/paage.
（2） To set up suspense/develop interest in ***************.
Step 2.Pre-reading
Task 1.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Let Ss *************************************************************
Task 2.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
*******************************************************************
Now, let’s see what happened to the***************/ let’s check whether it is right or not.
Purpose of my design: （1） to get to know something about the *****************.
（2） To have a better understanding about the importance of *******************.
Step 3.While-reading
Task 1.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Skimming: Ss should read the material fast to find out the main idea/topic sentence for each paragraph.
Para 1 *******************
Para 2 *******************
Para 3 *******************
…
Task 2.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Scanning: Listen to the tape part by part to finish ***************************.
Task 3.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Scanning: Guide Ss to read the material carefully and take some important notes, then answer the following questions.
Task 4.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Scanning: Ask Ss to read the material carefully and find out the correct answers to finish the following chart.
Purpose of my design: Enable students to understand the given material better by using different reading skills.And proper competition can arouse the Ss’ interest in English learning.\"Task-based\" teaching method is used here to develop the Ss’ ability of communication and also their ability of co-operation will be well trained.
Step 4.Post-reading
Task 1.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
（接task3）Ask Ss to close books and finish the summary according their notes.
（接task4）Retell the story /Sum up the paage in Ss’ own words according to the chart.
Task 2.（Individual work, pair work, group work, cla work; *****min）
Discu ***********************************************with other group members and then choose a reporter to share their opinions about ************************************ with the whole cla.
Purpose of my design: I think If the Ss can finish this task well, they will benefit a lot in their spoken English.Most Ss can take their parts in the activities, especially for the Ss who have trouble in English study.
Step 5.Homework
1.**************************************************
2.**************************************************
Purpose of my design: Homework is so important and neceary for to master the knowledge they learned after cla.It will check whether the Ss achieve the teaching aims.
推荐第2篇：全英初中英语教案
鲁人办发[2008]78号
关于做好2008年省内高校特困家庭毕业生求职补贴发放工作的通知
各高等学校:
按照山东省人民政府办公厅《关于做好特困家庭高校毕业生就业工作的通知》（鲁政办发[2008]21号）要求，现就做好2008年省内高校特困家庭毕业生求职补贴发放工作有关事项通知如下：
一、发放范围
求职补贴发放范围为符合城乡低保、零就业家庭、农村贫困家庭等特殊情况，就业有困难需要帮助的2008年省内高校山东生源应届毕业生（以下简称特困生）。其中，升学、出国、参军、指令性就业、暂无就业意愿的除外。
二、发放标准和原则
求职补贴按500元/人的标准发放，用于补贴特困生求职过程中发生的费用。 求职补贴申报和发放严格遵循诚实申请、公正受理、科学管理、公开透明、专款专用的原则。
三、申报办法
符合上述条件的特困生须向所在学校提交本人书面申请、生源所在县（市、区）民政部门核发的低保证或工会出具的《特困职工证》、扶贫办(部门)出具的特困证明及相关证明材料，并详细填写《山东省特困家庭高校毕业生求职补贴申请表》（以下简称《申请表》，见附件）。
特困生由所在学校确定，比例不得超过当年毕业生总数的5%。各学校要按照省教育厅、省财政厅《关于认真做好我省高等学校家庭经济困难学生认定工作的指导意见》（鲁教财字[2007]18号）认真做好初审工作。初审合格的特困生须采取适当方式在一定范围内公示。公示无异议后，以正式文件形式按非师范类和师范类分别报送省人事厅、省教育厅审核。其中2007年底非师范类毕业生生源审核时各学校申报并纳入省数据库的特困生可不再公示，本次审核确定后，只报送特困生名单（加盖学校公章）和《申请表》(从山东高校毕业生就业信息网下载)。
四、申报阶段时间安排
(一) 4月28日—5月7日，为申请、填表阶段。符合条件的特困生到所在高校毕业生就业工作部门提出申请，提交相关证明材料，并填写《申请表» (一式二份)。
(二) 5月8日—5月16日，为审核、公示阶段。各高校认真核查申请者相关材料，初审后在校内一定范围内公示。公示期为7天。
(三)5月23日前，为上报阶段。各高校务必在规定时间内报送相关材料。在报送时须出具正式文件（附特困生名单，按学号排序）和《申请表》，同时，各高校登陆“山东高校毕业生就业信息网”学校专区，使用“特困生管理”栏目的“求职补贴申报管理”功能，上报特困生数据。特困生的相关证明材料由学校妥善保管。
五、求职补贴的发放
省人事厅、省教育厅将各学校上报的特困生名单和《申请表》汇总后，确定发放求职补贴名单，制定发放方案。由省人事厅、省教育厅将补贴所需资金直接核拨至学校，由学校代发给特困生。
六、监督检查
各高校要高度重视求职补贴的发放工作，要明确专人负责，认真落实发放工作责任制。省人事厅、省教育厅将会同有关部门对各学校特困生相关证明材料和资金申报发放情况进行监督检查。对违反规定擅自扩大发放范围，或采取欺骗手段截留、挪用、挤占资金的，视情节轻重依法处理。
联系部门:山东省人事厅毕业生就业处、山东省教育厅学生处
联系 人:李峰、战斌、张如柏
联系电话:（0531）8859789
5、88943427，81916562
传真:（0531）88544043，86100076
二00八年月二十四日
推荐第3篇：全英初中英语教案
È«Ó¢³õÖÐÓ¢Óï½Ì°¸.txtÎÒºÜÏëÖªµÀ£¬¶àÉÙÈË·Ö¿ªÁË£¬»¹ÊÇÉî°®×Å¡£©f×Ô¼º¿Þ×Ô¼ºÐ¦×Ô¼º¿´×Å×Ô¼ºÄÖ¡£ÄãÓÃÒþÉíÀ´¶ã±ÜÎÒؼÎÒÓÃÒþÉíÀ´³ÉÈ«Ä㣡´ýµ½Ò»ÈÕȨÔÚÊÖ£¬É±¾¡ÌìϸºÎÒ¹·¡£Teaching Plan Be Careful with Numbers in Listening Cla: Cla 12, Senior Two Date: May 16,2007 Teacher: Ni Yazhen School: Zhi Yuan Senior High School Teaching Material: P75 S2B Oxford English; Additional material(The new Star Wars movie, Be Careful with Numbers) Teaching Objectives: Knowledge objectives: To enable students to listen and complete some exercises Ability Objectives: To encourage the students to have basic skills of listening.Emotion objectives: To cultivate the cooperation through peer interaction Teaching aids: Multi-media Teaching and learning method: Guiding for learning Teaching Procedures: I.Presentation Today we¡¯ll have a cla on listening practice ¡°Be careful with numbers in listening¡±: First we¡¯ll play a game.Then, we¡¯ll practice.Lead-in A game on number II.Performance: Quick and accurate response to numbers is very important in daily communication.Telephone numbers, addrees, prices, temperatures, time and dates all closely linked with the use of numbers .Besides, numbers also play a very important part in broadcast programmes such as reports Now let¡¯s listen to some advice from experts.Task 1 Be Careful with Numbers (Play the recorder Twice) Individual work¡úpair work(check the answer with your partner)¡úGroup work(Underline the important sentences.e.g.The differences between million and billion, ¡°-teen¡¯s¡± and ¡°-ty¡¯s¡± are ¡-..¡°Seventeen point five million.¡±¡-)Whole cla read the key sentences. Well-done! Numbers are all around us.Let us practice with numbers and learn to be good at numbers.(First read out the following numbers¡- Watch the screen) Task 2 Listen to some statements about the brief history of films and TV.First check the answers in groups.If you have different opinion , please raise your hands.Judgement: (First students give themselves a judge.Then teacher does it) It seems no challenge.Now, We¡¯ll do challenge exercise.So pay special attention to the numbers in the paage and select the correct answer from the choices listed below.First teach the students new words in listening material.Then ask students to read out the numbers in Star Wars.III.Promotion: Challenge exercise Star Wars Listen to the tape twice ¡úCheck the answers IV.Conclusion: What we learned today is ¡°Be careful with numbers in numbers.¡± Remember the following points when you are doing listening tasks: 1.Take great care with the spelling of names and with addrees and phones numbers, prices, time and dates...2.To find the right answer, you may need to do simple calculations or combine two sets of data.3.Listen carefully for words and phrases such as these: half / twice as expensive as¡- it¡¯s shorter / cheaper / quicker than¡- the lightest / heaviest / newest not as long / cheap / good as¡- Some useful abbreviations and symbols for note taking( See PPt.) V.Aignment: 1.Review P6-7 ¨CFilling in forms P43¨C Working with numbers 2.Collect some information on listening skills
Teaching Plan Be Careful with Numbers in Listening Cla: Cla 12, Senior Two Date: May 16,2007 Teacher: Ni Yazhen School: Zhi Yuan Senior High School Teaching Material: P75 S2B Oxford English; Additional material(The new Star Wars movie, Be Careful with Numbers) Teaching Objectives: Knowledge objectives: To enable students to listen and complete some exercises Ability Objectives: To encourage the students to have basic skills of listening.Emotion objectives: To cultivate the cooperation through peer interaction Teaching aids: Multi-media Teaching and learning method: Guiding for learning Teaching Procedures: I.Presentation Today we¡¯ll have a cla on listening practice ¡°Be careful with numbers in listening¡±: First we¡¯ll play a game.Then, we¡¯ll practice.Lead-in A game on number II.Performance: Quick and accurate response to numbers is very important in daily communication.Telephone numbers, addrees, prices, temperatures, time and dates all closely linked with the use of numbers .Besides, numbers also play a very important part in broadcast programmes such as reports Now let¡¯s listen to some advice from experts.Task 1 Be Careful with Numbers (Play the recorder Twice) Individual work¡úpair work(check the answer with your partner)¡úGroup work(Underline the important sentences.e.g.The differences between million and billion, ¡°-teen¡¯s¡± and ¡°-ty¡¯s¡± are ¡-..¡°Seventeen point five million.¡±¡-)Whole cla read the key sentences. Well-done! Numbers are all around us.Let us practice with numbers and learn to be good at numbers.(First read out the following numbers¡- Watch the screen) Task 2 Listen to some statements about the brief history of films and TV.First check the answers in groups.If you have different opinion , please raise your hands.Judgement: (First students give themselves a judge.Then teacher does it) It seems no challenge.Now, We¡¯ll do challenge exercise.So pay special attention to the numbers in the paage and select the correct answer from the choices listed below.First teach the students new words in listening material.Then ask students to read out the numbers in Star Wars.III.Promotion: Challenge exercise Star Wars Listen to the tape twice ¡úCheck the answers IV.Conclusion: What we learned today is ¡°Be careful with numbers in numbers.¡± Remember the following points when you are doing listening tasks: 1.Take great care with the spelling of names and with addrees and phones numbers, prices, time and dates...2.To find the right answer, you may need to do simple calculations or combine two sets of data.3.Listen carefully for words and phrases such as these: half / twice as expensive as¡- it¡¯s shorter / cheaper / quicker than¡- the lightest / heaviest / newest not as long / cheap / good as¡- Some useful abbreviations and symbols for note taking( See PPt.) V.Aignment: 1.Review P6-7 ¨CFilling in forms P43¨C Working with numbers 2.Collect some information on listening skills
Teaching Plan ----Yang Xuefen Content: Unit 4 He said I was hardworking.>, Grade 8(¢ò) Time: March 12th, the 1st period, Place: Cla 6, Grade 8
Teaching goals: 11.Knowledge goal: 1.Vocabulary: hard-working, be mad at, not---anymore 2.Patterns: What did Marcia say? She said she was she was having a party for Lanna.22.Ability goal: Learn to report what someone said correctly 33.Moral goal: To teach students not to report wrong meage or they may cause trouble.To be an honest and good kid, report what someone said correctly.Teaching aids: multi-media
Teaching procedures: Step 1: Leading in by free talking with the students: Ask several Ss what they are going to do after school .Write their sentences on the Bb.How are you? How is your mother? What are you doing? What is your mother doing? What do you do in the morning? What about your mother? What are you going to do after school? What is your mother going to do after work? I¡¯m fine.My mother is fine.I¡¯m having a cla.My mother is working.I have leons in the morning? My mother works in the morning.I am going to play sports after school My mother is going to cook after work.
Step 2: Pre-task T: Now I¡¯m going to report what xx said to you: xx said he was fine.And he said his mother was fine, too.He said he was having a cla and his mother was working.He said he had leons in the morning and his mother worked in the morning.He said he was going to play sports after school.He said his mother was going to cook after work.Step 3: While-task 1.Observe the sentences on the blackboard, find out what is different in my report He/ She said--------.4.SBp26/1a: Write the words soap opera on the board.Point to the picture and ask students what they think a soap opera is.Point out the TV screens in the picture.Ask one student to read what the person says in the first picture .Then ask another student: What did she/he say? Help to answer: She/He said she/he was having a surprise party for Lana on Friday night.6.Repeat with the other pictures.SB Page 26 , 1b .Listen and Number the pictures.SB Page 27 , 2a & 2b .1.Ask some individuals to read these sentences.2.Play the recording .Ss circle their answer.3.Check the answers.Step 5: Grammar Focus 1.Review the grammar box.Ask Ss to say the statements.2.Explain: In each case, the direct speech talks about present situations and the reported speech talks about past situations .Step 6: Practice: 1.Pa on What MsYang said one to another, then the last one tell the whole cla: I love my students.Ms Yang said she loved her students.I can speak English.Ms.Yang said she could speak English.I want to be a writer.Ms.Yang said she wanted to be a writer.I am playing games with my students.Ms.Yang said she was playing games with her students.2. What can you do? What are you going to be when you grow up? How are you going to do that? ---------- Report: xxx said he/she could---.He/She was going to be a/an----.She/ He was going to---- Xxx said ------ I hope ----- Step 7: Homework Grammar Focus Section A
Step1 Lead-in 1.Ask students: What year is this year? 2.Show students the picture of twelve animals in Chinese horoscope, and tell them different namesTell them this year is in the year of the Rat.3.Ask students: How old are you? When were you born? (What year were you born in?) What is your animal sign? What characters do you think it has? 4.Ask students: What month were you born in? (review twelve months in a year) 5.Tell students that everyone in western countries has his or her own star sign.(T: We know that animal signs are very popular in Chinese culture, we are familiar with them.But people in western countries have their own star signs according to the birth month.It can tell you something about your abilities, talents and special qualities.) Step 2 Welcome to the unit 1.Show students the picture of star signs.¡°How much do you know about them?¡± Let students gue different star signs.(can be in Chinese) 2.In the West, people use some creatures to represent the star signs.Can you tell me their names? Teach students new words.3.Look at the pictures and read the new words after the teacher.4.Let students finish Part A on P7 and check the answers by reading the names.5.Some more exercises to see if students have known the star signs.(1) Show students 6 pictures and name the star signs.(2) Play a gueing game: fill in the blanks by using the names of the creatures.6.Tell students there are 6 more star signs and let them gue what they are represented by using the 6 pictures in Part B on P7.7.Check the answers to Part B.Step 3 Oral practice 1.Ask students: When is your birthday? What is your star sign? 2.Show students the twelve star signs and let them point out their own star sign in both English and Chinese.Ask the students to try to remember their own star sign.3.Pair work: Let students ask and answer in pairs.Step 4 Comic strips 1.Are you interested in star signs? So are Eddie and Hobo.Listen to their conversation and repeat it after the tape.2.Ask students some questions to see if they have known the dialogue.(1) Who brings Eddie the newspaper? (2) What does Hobo ask Eddie to read? Why? (3) What do Eddie¡¯s stars say? (4) What happens to Eddie¡¯s breakfast at the end of the story? 3.Let students read the dialogue by themselves (or practice in pairs) 4.Do some more exercises after reading and check the answers together.5.What do you think Hobo¡¯s and Eddie¡¯s star signs are? 6.Oral practice: Try to act out this dialogue in pairs Ask the students to make a new dialogue by adding their own ideas.Step 5 Homework 1.Remember the star signs.2.Make up a new dialogue about star signs.3.Try to find out how many clamates are under the star sign as you.
Step 1 Revision 1.Finish some exercises.2.Review the star signs: look at the star signs and name them.Read together after the teacher.3.Gueing game: (Test who has the best memory) Teacher will say the Chinese name of the star sign; students try to find out the right picture and say the name in English.Step 2 Lead-in 1.Free talk: (1) What is your star sign? (2) Can you tell me something about yourself? ( abilities, special qualities, characteristics) (3) How many students are under the same star sign as you? (Yesterday¡¯s homework) (4) What are they like? (clever, kind, generous, hard-working, brave, patient, polite¡-.) (5) Do you share similar characteristics? (Let students speak out as many adjectives about characters as poible.) 2.Do you know these words? They are also used to describe people.(Teach the new words, and finish Exercise B on P10.) 3.Read the new words after the teacher.Then let students read the sentences by themselves.4.Do some more exercises to see if students have known all the words¡¯ meanings.Step 3 Reading 1.T: It¡¯s said that star signs can represent a person¡¯s characteristics.Let¡¯s check if it is true.Please listen to the tape and learn something about them.2.Reading task 1: After listening to the tape, do ¡°T¡± or ¡°F¡± questions.3.Reading task 2: Ask students some questions to check if they have known the main idea, with the books open.(1) Is Aries lazy? (2) Which star sign likes saving money? (3) Does Sagittarius like telling jokes? (4) Which star sign has the best imagination? (5) If your birthday is on 13th September, what is your star sign? 4.Make students read the article paage by paage and try to find out the adjectives to describe people¡¯s characteristics with the picture of each star sign.(Esp.their own star sign) T: Whose star sign is Aries? When is your birthday? What characteristics do you have/ do this star sign have?
Aries: energetic, active, impatient, selfish Taurus: stubborn, hard-working, patient Gemini: curious, clever, outgoing Cancer: kind Leo: strong, confident, generous Virgo: modest, practical Libra: polite, fair, elegant Scorpio: powerful, silly Sagittarius: humorous, lucky Capricorn: succeful, patient Aquarius: kind, wise, strange Pisces: generous, kind, gentle, easy-going, creative, imaginative
5.Discuion: What is your star sign? Do you have the same characteristics as the star sign says? Do you think what the star signs say about people are facts? -- So we can have a conclusion: What the star signs say about people are not facts.We can just learn about star signs for fun.Step 4 Some More Exercises 1.What are your characteristics? Write a short description of your own characteristics.2.Then show your description to your partner.3.Discu with your partner whether or not you agree with each other.Step 5 Homework 1.Read the paage three times.2.Remember all the adjectives which describe a person¡¯s characteristics.
Step 1 Revision 1.Ask students some questions while showing Picture 1.(1) How many star signs are there in a year? (2) How do you know your star sign? What decides your star sign? (3) Do the people under the same star sign share similar characteristics? (4) What characteristics do the people under your star sign have? 2.Explain the language points while answering the above questions.1) A year is divided into 12 different star signs.2) Your date of birth decides your star sign.3) People born under the same star sign share similar characteristics.3.Ask more questions about Reading 1) Which star sign doesn¡¯t give up easily? 2) Which star sign loves peace and doesn¡¯t like to argue with others? 3) Which star sign is suggested to forgive others for their mistakes? 4) Which star sign likes to dream about everything? 4.Teach the language points by answering the above questions.(1) You are patient and do not give up easily.(2) You love peace and do not like to argue with others.(3) Sometimes it is silly of you not to forgive others for their mistakes.(4) You like to dream about everything.Step2 Group work 1.Show students some pictures and paages about some famous people.Let students gue what star signs they are? 2.Finish Part C2 on Page11, and then check the answers.3.Discuion: What kind of friend do you like to make? (Why?) What is his/her star sign? (Let students talk about his or her own characteristics and his or her friend¡¯s.) 4.What star signs are suitable for these jobs? Why? Step 4 Conclusion What star signs say about people are not facts.We should work hard to make our dream come true.Step 5 Homework 1.Read the paage again and again.2.Do some exercises.
推荐第4篇：中考仁爱英语全短语
Phrases for Project English (Selected by Breitkopf)
a bit of 一点点（不可数名词） a couple of 一双，若干个 a dozen of 一打，十二个 a few 一些（可数名词） a gla of 一杯
a good result 好的结果
a great number of 许多，大量的 a kind of 一种
a little 一点点（不可数名词） a little bit more 再来一点 a lot 很，非常（说程度）
a lot of 许多，大量（可数&不可数） a number of 许多
a pair of 一双（shoe…） a piece of 一张，一条，一块 a sort of 一种 a type of 一种
a waste of time / money 浪费… above all 总之
achieve one’s dream / goal / aim acro the world 遍及全世界 act…out 把…表演出来
adapt to sth./ doing sth.适应… add…to… 把…添加进…
advise sb.to do sth.建议做某事 after cla 课后
after doing sth.在做某事后 after meals 饭后 after school 放学后
again and again 一次又一次 against the wall 靠着墙 against the wind 逆着风
agree on sth.在某事上达成一致 agree to do sth.同意做某事 agree with 同意某人（的观点） ahead of time 提前 aim at sth./ sb.瞄准… aim to do sth.力争做某事 all by oneself 全靠某人自己 all over the world 遍及全世界 All right 好的 all the same 仍然 all the time 一直
all year round 一年到头
allow doing sth.允许做某事
allow sb.to do sth.允许…做某事 and so on 等等
answer the phone 接电话 argue with sb.和某人吵架 around the world 遍及全世界 arrive at 到达（小地方） arrive in 到达（大地方） as a matter of fact 事实上 as a result 结果
as for 至于
as if 似乎，好像
as it’s known to all 众所周知 as long as 只要… as soon as 一…就… as usual 和平常一样 as well 也 as well as 也
ask and answer 问答 ask for sth.要求… ask for a ride 搭便车
ask sb.for advice 征询某人的建议 ask sb.for help 向某人寻求帮助 ask sb.to do sth.让某人做某事 at a distance 在远处 at first 首先 at home 在家
at home and abroad 国内外 at last 最后 at least 至少
at midnight 在半夜 at most 至多 at night 在晚上 at noon 在中午 at once 立刻，马上 at present 目前 at school 在学校
at that moment 在那个时刻 at that time 在那时
at the age of 在…岁大时 at the back of 在…后面 at the bank of 在…岸上
at the beginning of 在…开始 at the bottom of 在…底部 at the corner of 在…角落 at the cost of 以…的代价
at the distance 稍远处,暗含比较 at the doctor’s 在诊所 at the end of 在…末尾 at the foot of 在…脚下 at the gate of 在…门口
at the moment 现在（进行时） at the price of 以…的价格 at the same time 与此同时 at the speed of 以…的速度 at the top of 在…顶部 at this moment at times 有时候 at work 在工作
avoid doing sth.避免做某事 Bad luck.倒霉
be / get used to (doing) sth.习惯于be able to do sth.能够… be absent 缺席
be acro from 在…对面 be afraid of 害怕… be afraid that 担心…
be afraid to do sth.害怕去做… be allowed to do sth.被允许做… be alone 独自一人
be amazed at 对…感到惊奇 be angry about sth.对某事生气 be angry at sth.对某事生气 be attractive to 对…有吸引力 be back 回来
be bad for 对…有害 be based on 以…为基础 be born + adj.天生…
be born in 出生在某地 / 某年月 be born on 出生在某天
be busy doing sth.忙于做某事 be busy with sth.忙于做某事 be cancelled 被取消 be close to 接近, 靠近… be cruel to 对…残忍
be different from 和…不同
be disappointed at sth.对某事感失望be dismied 被解雇 be divided into 被分成… be famous as 作为…而出名 be famous for 因为…而出名 be filled with… 被装满了…
be fond of (doing) sth.喜欢(做)… be for sale 待售
be forced sb.to do sth.被迫做某事 be free 免费的, 空闲的 be friendly to 对…友好 be from 来自…
be full of (energy) 充满了… be good at 擅长…
be good for 对…有好处 be grateful to 对…感激 be hanged 被绞死
be happy to do sth.很高兴去做… be harmful to 对…有害 be hidden 被藏起来 be hunger for 渴望…
be impatient to sb.(sth.) 对…没耐心 be impolite to do sth.做…不礼貌 be important for sb.to do sth.
做某事对某人来说是重要的 be important to 对…重要
be in + color 穿着某种颜色衣服 be in a / the hospital 在医院 be in a bad mood 坏心情 / 情绪 be in a good mood 好心情 / 情绪 be in danger 处于危险中
be in danger of 处于…的危险中
be in high spirits 情绪高涨 be in hospital 生病住院 be in need 处于困难中 be in need of 需要，缺少… be in the distance
be in trouble 处于麻烦中 be interested in 对…感兴趣 be kind to 对…友好
be known as 作为…而出名 be known to 被…所熟知 be late for 迟到 be like 像
be lost = miing丢了
be made from 由…制成（化学变化）be made into 被做成…
be made of 由…制成（物理变化） be made up of 由…组成
be married with sb.和某人结婚 be mentioned 被提到 be miing 丢了
be moved by 被…感动
be neceary for …对…来说很必要 be of great importance 很重要 be of great value = valuable有价值 be of the same age 同龄 be on busine 在出差 be on fire 着火
be on holiday 在度假 be on sale 在售 be on show 在展出 be on vacation 在度假
be ordered to do sth.被命令做… be out 外出了, 落伍了 be out of balance 失去平衡 be out of control 失控 be out of danger 脱离危险 be out of reach 够不到 be out of sight 消失 be out of style 过时 be out of work 失业 be patient to 对…有耐心
be pleased to do sth.很高兴去… be pleased with 对…满意
be polite to do sth.做…是礼貌的 be poor at (doing) sth.不擅长… be popular with 受…欢迎 be present 在场
be proud of 对…感到骄傲 be punished 被惩罚 Be quiet! 安静
be ready for 为…做好准备
be ready to do sth.准备好做某事 be repaired 被修理 be rich in 在某方面富足 be satisfied with 对…感到满意 be separated 被分开 be short of 短缺 be sick of 厌倦了… be similar to 和…相似
be sorry for 对…感到抱歉, 遗憾 be sorry that 感到抱歉的是…
be sorry to do sth.很抱歉去做某事 be stolen 被偷
be strange to 对…感到陌生 be strict about sth.对某事严格 be strict in (doing) sth.对某事严格 be strict with sb.对某人严格
be succeful in doing sth.成功做某事be suitable for …对…适合
be supposed to do sth.应该做某事 be sure 确信
be sure of 对…感到确信 be sure that 感到确信的是
be sure to do sth.做某事很确信 be surprised at 对…感到吃惊 be surrounded by 被…包围 be thankful to 对…感激
be tired of sth./ doing sth.厌倦了..be unfriendly to 对…不友好 be unknown to 不被…所熟知 be unpopular with 不受…的欢迎 be used for doing sth.被用来… be weak in 在某方面差 be wiped out 被消灭 be worried about 担心…
be worth doing sth.值得做某事 because of 因为…
before doing sth.在做某事之前 before long 不久 before meals 饭前
beg one’s pardon 请求某人原谅 begin doing sth.开始做某事 begin to do sth.开始做某事 begin with 以…开始 believe in 相信, 信任 belong to 属于
Best wishes to you! 最美好的祝福 between…and… 在…和…之间 billons of 数十亿 blow away 吹走 blow out 吹灭
borrow…from… 从…借… both…and… 两者都 break down 抛锚, 降解 break out 爆发
break the promise 食言 break the record 打破记录 bring down 推翻
bring…to… 把…带到...brush one’s teeth 刷牙 build sb.up 增强某人体质 build up 逐步建立
buy sth.for sb.= buy sb.sth.
为某人买某物
by accident 意外地 by air 坐飞机 by chance 意外地 by mistake 错误地 by the way 顺便说，问 call for 要求, 需要 call on 号召 call oneself 自称 call sb.打电话给某人
call sb.back 给某人回电话 call sb.up 给某人打电话 calm down 冷静
can do sth.能, 会做某事 can’t be 不可能是…
can’t help doing sth.忍不住做某事 can’t wait to do sth.迫不及待做某事care for 关心, 照顾 carry out 执行
carry…to… 把…搬到… catch a cold 感冒
catch one’s eye 吸引某人注意 catch up with 赶上…
cause sb./ sth.to do sth.引起… change…into… 把…变成… chat online 网上聊天 chat with sb.和某人聊天 cheat in the exams 考试作弊 cheat oneself 自欺欺人 check over 仔细检查 check up 检查, 核对 cheer sb.on 为某人加油 cheer sb.up 使某人振奋 choose…from… 从…选择… clap one’s hands鼓掌 clean and tidy 干净整洁 click on 点击（计算机用语） climb mountains 爬山 collect coins 收集硬币 collect stamps 收集邮票 come about 发生 come back 回来
come back from 从…回来 come back to 返回…
come back to life 复苏, 复活 come down 下来 come from 来自于… come here 过来 come in 进来
come into being 形成 do sth.immediately 马上做某事
fall down 落下 get hurt 受伤 go for a picnic 去野餐
come on 快点, 加油
do sth.(A) instead of doing sth.(B) fall ill 生病
get in
go for a walk 去散步 come out 开放
做A而不是做B fall in love with sb.爱上某人 get in touch with sb.和某人取得联系 go home 回家 come over 顺便拜访
do sth.instead of sb.代替某人做某事 fall into 掉进 get into 进入
go mad 变疯
come to an end 结束
do sth.together 一起做某事 far away 很远
get into trouble 陷入麻烦
go on doing sth.继续做某事 come true 实现
do sth.well 某事做得好 far away from 离…很远 get married with sb.和某人结婚 go on with 继续某事 come up with 赶上, 想出主意
do the dishes 洗碗 feed on 以…为食
get off 下车 go out 出去
communicate with sb.和某人交流
do well in 在某方面做的好 feel good about oneself 自我感觉好 get old 变老 go roller skating 去滑旱冰 compare…to… 把…比作…
do with 处理—what feel like doing sth.想做某事 get on 上车
go rowing 去划船 compare…with… 把…和….比较
Do/Would you mind (not) doing sth.feel sorry for 对…感到抱歉 get ready for 为…做准备
go skiing 去滑雪 congratulate sb.祝贺…
Do/Would you mind if sb.do sth.fetch sth.for sb.= fetch sb.sth.
get ready to do sth.准备好做某事
go straight 笔直走
connect to 连接到
Do/Would you mind sb’s doing sth.为某人取来某物 get sb.to do sth.让某人做某事 connect…with… 把…和…连起来
Don’t be worried 别担心 fight against go through 穿过（内部） 和…做斗争 get sick of (doing) sth.厌倦做某事 go to 去…
consider doing sth.考虑做某事
Don’t worry 别担心 fight for 为了…而斗争 / 奋斗 get sth.得到某物 go to a / the concert 去音乐会 consider…as… 把…当做…
dozens of 数个 fight with 和…打架 / 斗争 get through 接通（电话） continue doing sth.继续做某事
draw pictures 画画 figure out go to bed 去睡觉
计算出，估计，理解 get tired 变累 go to do sth.去做某事 continue to do sth.继续做某事
draw up 起草，草拟 figure sb.out 理解某人 get to 到达 go to school 去上学 cook meals 做饭
dream about sth./ doing sth.梦想做某事 fill in 填写 get together 聚会，团聚 cost sb.money to do sth.花某人钱做某事 dream of sth./ doing sth.梦想做某事
fill out go to sleep 去睡觉
填写 get up 起床 go to (the) church 去教堂 couple with sb.和某人结婚
dre in 穿衣 fill…with… 用…填写… get used to (doing) sth.习惯于（做）某事 couples of 数个…
dre oneself 某人自己穿衣 find / feel it + adj.to do sth.go to the cinema 去看电影 get warm 变暖和 cut down 砍倒
drink to sb./ sth.庆祝…，为…干杯 find out go to the movies 去看电影 找出，查明 cut off 切断
dry clean 干洗 find pleasure in sth./ doing sth.give a concert 举行音乐会 go towards 朝…走 cut up 切碎
each of us / them 我们每一个 finish doing sth.give a lecture 进行讲座 go up 上涨（价格…） 结束做某事 give a meage 捎信cut…into… 把…切成…
each one 每一个 first of allgo wrong 出错 首先 dance the disco 跳迪斯科
each other 相互，彼此 fix up give a report 作报告 Good job! 干得好
安装，修理 dare (not) do sth.（不）敢做某事
each time 每次 flood and droughts give a speech 做演讲 good manners 好的习惯 涝旱 day and night 夜以继日，没日没夜地
eat / have dinner 吃晚饭 fly a kite / kites give a talk 做演讲 Good night! 晚安
放风筝 day by day 一天天地
eat out 下馆子 follow a healthy diet give advice to 给…建议 graduate from 从…毕业 遵循健康饮食 deal with 处理—how
eat up 吃光 follow one’s advice / suggestions give off 散发 grow up 长大
give out 分发decide on sth.在某事上达成一致
either…or… 要么…要么… 采纳某人的建议gue riddles 猜谜语
decide to do sth.决定做某事
encourage sb.to do sth.鼓励某人做某事 follow one’s instructions 遵循某人教诲 give sb.a call 给某人打电话 had better (not) do sth.最好… depend on 依赖，取决于
end with 以…结束 follow sb.跟上 / 理解某人 give sb.a hand 帮助某人 half an hour 半小时 die from 死于（外因）
enjoy doing sth.喜欢做某事 follow the rules 遵守规则 give sb.a leon 给某人教训 hand in 上交
die of 死于（内因）
enjoy oneself 某人玩的愉快 for a little whilegive sb.some advice on 一小会hand in hand 手拉手 在某方面给予某人建议 die out 灭绝
enough…(adj./ adv.) to do sth.for certain 确信 happen to …发生了…
discu with sb.和某人讨论
足够…去做某事 for ever give sth.to sb.= give sb.sth.永远 把某物给某人 / 给某人某物 hate doing sth.讨厌做某事 dislike doing sth.不喜欢做某事
erase…from… 从…擦除… for example 例如 give support to 给予…支持 hate to do sth.讨厌做某事 divide…into… 把…分成…
escape from doing sth.逃避… for instance 例如 give up sth./ doing sth.放弃（做）某事 have / eat breakfast 吃早饭 do badly in 在某方面差
even if 即使 for long 长时间地 give…back to… 把…还给… have a / an…life 过着…生活 do busine 做生意
even though 即使 for the better 朝好的方向 glaes of 数杯 have a backache 背痛 do exercise 做运动
ever sinceforbid sb.to do sth.禁止某人做某事 go abroad 出国 have a break 休息 do experiments 做试验
every other day 每隔一天 force sb.to do sth.强迫某人做某事 go acro 穿过（表面） have a cold 感冒
do harm to 对…有害
exactly the same 完全一样 forget doing sth.忘记做过了某事 go ahead 开始 have a conversation with sb.和…交流 do homework 做作业
exchange…with… 和…交换… forget to do sth.忘记去做某事 go along 沿着…走 have a cough 咳嗽 do housework 做家务
excuse sb.原谅某人 from now on 从现在起 go back 回来
have a fever 发烧
do one’s best to do sth.尽最大力做某事 expect sb.to do sth.期盼某人…
from the bottom of my heart 从内心深处 go back to 返回到… have a gift for doing sth.有做…的天赋do research on 在…（方面）做研究
explain sth.to sb.向某人解释… from then on 从那时起 go bad 变质（食物…） have a good time 玩的愉快 do sb.a favor 帮助某人
expre oneself 自我表达 from…to… 从…到… go beyond 超过…范围 have a headache 头痛 do some cleaning 做清洁
face sth./ sb.面对… generally speaking 通常来说 go boating 去划船 have a look (at) 看 do some shopping 购物
face to face 面对面 get along well with 和…友好相处 go by 路过 have a meeting 开会 do some washing 洗衣服
facial gestures 面部表情 get back 回来 go camping 去野营 have a pain in …痛 do sports 做运动
fail to do sth.做某事失败 get back from 从…回来 go cycling 去骑自行车 have a party 举行派对 do sth.alone 独自做某事
fall asleep 入睡 get down 下来 go deaf 变聋 have a picnic 进行野餐 fall behind 落后
get fat 变胖 go fishing 去钓鱼
have a rest 休息
have a seat 坐下
have a stomachache 胃痛
have a sweet tooth 喜欢吃甜食 have a temperature 发烧 have a toothache 牙痛 have a try 试一下 have a walk 散步
have an / the ability to do sth.
有做某事的能力
have an effect on 对…有影响 have an influence on / over
对…有影响
have an interview 采访 have cla 上课
have difficulties (in) doing sth.
做某事有困难
have fun 玩的开心
have fun doing sth.做某事愉快 have fun with
have one’s bill 结账
have sb.do sth.让某人做某事 have sb.’s attention 某人的注意 have the flu 得流感 have to do sth.不得不…
have difficulty/trouble with sth.有困难 have trouble (in) doing sth.做某事有困难head on 迎头，正面地 head to 朝…出发
hear from 收到某人来信 hear of 听说
hear sb.do sth.听到某人做某事 hear sb.doing sth.听到某人正在… heart and lungs 心肺
help sb.(to) do sth.帮助某人做… help sb.with sth.在…某事上帮助...help…out 帮助…解决… here and there 到处 Here it is.给你 Here you are.给你 hide and seek 捉迷藏
hold on 稍等（电话用语） hold one’s breath 屏住呼吸 hold up
hope sb.to do sth.希望某人做某事 hope to do sth.希望做某事 How / What about doing sth.
How do you like…? 认为…怎么样 how far 多远（问路程远近）
how long 多长（问时间物体长度） how many 多少（可数名词） how much 多少（钱&不可数） how often 问频率 how old 多大年龄
how soon 多快，多久（一般将来时） hundreds of 数百…
hurry to do sth.急忙做某事 hurry to sp.急忙去某地 hurry up 快点
hurt oneself 伤害某人自己 imagine doing sth.想象做某事 improve oneself 提高某人自己 in a / an…voice 用…声音 in a hurry 匆忙地
in a minute 立刻，马上 in a moment 稍后 in a word 总之 in all 总之
in alphabetical 按字母排序 in ancient world 在古代世界 in cla 在课上 in detail 详细地
in different ways / methods用不同方法 in English 用英语 in fact 事实上
in front of 在…前面 in general 通常来说 in groups 按组… in honor of 纪念… in memory of 纪念… in one breath 一口气
in one’s free / spare time
在某人空闲时间
in one’s opinion 在某人看来 in one’s view 在某人看来 in order 按顺序 in order that 为了…
in order to do sth.为了做某事 in recent years / days
在最近一些年（天） in short 总之
in some occasions 在某些场合 in some situations 在某些情况下 in space 在宇宙空间 in surprise 吃惊地
in the beginning 在开始 in the center of 在…正中间 in the daytime 在白天 in the end 最后
in the first place 首先，最重要的是 in the front of 在…的前面 in the future 以后，将来
in the last few years 在过去的几年 in the middle of 在…中间
in the modern society 在现代社会
in the morning / afternoon / evening
在早上，下午，晚上
in the near future 在不远的将来 in the open air 在户外 in the past 在过去 in the sun 在太阳下
in the wall 在墙里 in the world 在世界上
in this area 在这个地区（领域） in time 及时 in total 总共
increase by 增长了（程度） increase to 增长到
insist on doing sth.坚持做某事 instead of 取代，而不是
introduce…to… 把…介绍给… invite sb.to do sth.邀请某人做某事 invite sb.to sp.邀请某人去某地 It doesn’t matter.没关系 It seems that 似乎 It’s a pleasure.很乐意
It’s adj.to do sth.做某事是怎样的 It’s certain that 毫无疑问的是… It’s neceary to do sth.做某事必要 It’s not your busine.不关你的事 It’s one’s duty to do sth.
做某事是某人的责任，职责
It’s one’s honor to do sth.
做某事是某人的荣耀
It’s one’s turn to do sth.轮到某人做…It’s reported that 据报道 It’s said that 据说
It’s time for sb.to do sth.到了某人做某事的时间了 It’s time for sth./ doing sth.
到了做某事的时间了
It’s time to do sth.
到了做某事的时间了 join in 参加
join…together 把…连接起来 jump into 跳进 just a moment 稍等 just now 刚刚
just so-so 不过如此
keep a diary / diaries 记日记 keep away from 远离
keep doing sth.保持做某事 keep fit 保持健康
keep healthy 保持健康
keep in touch with sb.和…保持联系 keep on doing sth.坚持做某事 keep one’s promise 守信 keep pets 养宠物
Keep quiet! 保持安静
keep sb.doing sth.让某人一直做某事 keep the secret 保守秘密 keep up 保持，继续
keep up with 保持，继续…
keep…from doing sth.阻止…做某事 kinds of 数种
knock at 敲（硬东西）
knock into 装上
knock on 敲（软东西） know about 了解 last but not least last night 昨天晚上 last year 去年 later on 稍后 laugh at 嘲笑
lead sb.to do sth.领导某人做某事 lead to 导致
learn to do sth.学习做某事 learn…by oneself 自学… learn…from… 从…学习… learn for 了解
leave a meage 留言 leave for 动身前往
leave…for… 离开…前往… lend…to… 把…借给… le and le 越来越少 le than 少于
let sb.do sth.让某人做某事 lie down 躺下 lie in 位于
lie to sb.对某人撒谎 light pollution 光污染 like doing sth.喜欢做某事 like to do sth.喜欢做某事
limit sb.to do sth.限制某人做某事 limit the use of 限制…的使用 limit to 限于，局限于 listen to 听
live a / an…life 过着…的生活 live in 住在… live on 以…为生
live with sb.和某人住在一起 long ago 很久以前 look after 照看，照顾 look ahead 向前看 look around 环顾 look at 看着 look for 寻找
look forward to 盼望 look into 调查 look like 看起来像 look out 小心，当心 look out of 向…的外面看 look over 仔细检查
look the same 看起来一样 look up 查找（字典），向上看 lose face 丢脸 lose heart 灰心
lose one’s life 失去某人的生命 lose one’s way 迷路
lose oneself in 沉迷，陶醉于…
lost and found 失物招领 lots of 许多的，大量的 love doing sth.喜欢做某事 love to do sth.喜欢做某事 major in 以…为专业
make a contribution to 为…做贡献 make a decision 做决定 make a plan 指定计划 make a promise 许诺 make a reservation 预定
make a self-introduction 自我介绍 make a survey 做调查 make a wish 许愿
make an agreement with与…达成协议make cards 制作卡片
make efforts to do sth.努力做某事 make electricity 发电 make excuses 找借口 make faces 做鬼脸
make friends with sb.和某人交朋友 make laws 制定法律 make mistakes 犯错误 make money 挣钱 make noise 制造噪音 make one’s bed 铺床
make oneself understood使某人自己被明白
make peace with sb.和某人和平相处 make phone calls 打电话 make progre 取得进步 make room for 为…腾位子 make sb.do sth.让某人做某事 make sense 有意义
make sense of 明白，听懂 make up 编造，组成
make up one’s mind to do sth.
下定决心做某事
make…adj.使得…怎么样 make…done 使得…被怎么样 make…n.选，让…当…
manage to do sth.设法做某事
marry sb.嫁给某人 may be 也许，可能 mend roads 修路 millions of 数百万
mi a / the chance 错过机会 mistake…for… 把…错当成是… more and more 越来越多 more or le 或多或少 more than 多于
mountain climbing 爬山 move to 搬到
move…to… 把…搬到 much too 太…
musical instrument 乐器 must be 一定是
must be doing sth.一定正在做某事 name after 以…来命名 need to do sth.需要做某事 neither…nor… 既不…也不… next time 下次
next to 在…旁边 / 附近next week / year 明年 no better than 还不如 no longer 不再 no more
No problem.没问题 noise pollution 噪音污染 Not at all.一点也不 not exactly 不完全
not only…but also… 不仅…而且…not so / as…as… 不和…一样… not…any longer 不再 not…any more 不再 not…until 直到…才… obey the rules 遵守规则 occasion to wear Of course.当然
of one’s own 某人自己的
offer sth.to sb.给某人提供某物 on an empty stomach 空腹 on duty 值日
on earth 到底，在地球上 on foot 步行
on one hand 一方面
on one’s way to 在某人去…的路上 on show 在展出
on the bank of 在…的岸上 on the beach 在沙滩上
on the corner of 在…和…的拐角 on the farm 在农场 on the ground 在地面上 on the Internet 在网上 on the left 在左边
on the left of 在…的左边
on the morning of 在某天的早上 on the other hand 另一方面 on the phone 在电话里
on the playground 在操场上 on the radio 在收音机里 on the right of 在…的右边 on the shelf 在架子上 on the sofa 在沙发上 on the stage 在舞台上 on the street 在街上
on the surface of 在…的表面 on the wall 在墙上 on time 按时 on TV 在电视里 once again 又一次 once in a while 有时候 once more 再一次
once upon a time 很久以前 one after another 一个接一个 one day 有一天
one hour and a half 一个半小时 order sb.to do sth.命令某人… ought to do sth.应该做某事 over the radio 通过收音机 over there 在那边 pairs of 数双 pa away 去世
pa…to… 把…递给… pay a visit to 参观，访问 pay attention to 注意… pay for 为…付钱
pay…for… 为…付出…（多少钱）pay the price for 为…付出代价 perform ballet 表演芭蕾 pick sb.up 让某人搭便车 pick up 捡起
pieces of 数片，张，条 places of interest 名胜 plan for 为…做打算
plan to do sth.计划做某事 plant trees 植树
play a role / part in 扮演…的角色 play a trick on sb.戏弄某人 play against 和…比赛 play baseball 打棒球 play basketball 打篮球 play cards 打牌 play che 下棋
play computer games 玩电脑游戏play erhu 拉二胡 play soccer 踢足球 play the drums 打鼓 play the guitar 弹吉他 play the piano 弹钢琴 play the violin 拉小提琴
play video games 玩电子游戏 play volleyball 打排球 plenty of 许多的，大量的 plug in 插入
point at 指着某个事物 point to 指着某个方向 point out 指出
point…to… 用…指着… pour…into… 把…倒进… practice doing sth.练习做某事 prefer doing sth.更喜欢做某事 prefer to do sth.更喜欢做某事
prefer to do A.rather than do B.
say goodbye to 向…告别
宁可做A，也不做B say hello to向…问好 prefer…to… 相对…更喜欢… say sorry to 向…道歉 prepare for 为…做准备 say thanks to 向…道谢 prepare…for… 为…准备… search for 寻找
prevent…from doing sth.阻止…做某事 search…for… 在…寻找… promise sb.to do sth.答应某人做某事 see sb.do sth.看到某人做某事 promise that 答应… see sb.doing sth.看到某人正在做某事 promise to do sth.答应做某事 see sb.off 送别 protect…from… 保护…免受… see…oneself 亲眼目睹 provide sb.with sth.给某人提供某物 seem like 似乎，好像 spend…on… 在某事上花钱，时间
stand by 站在…一边 stand for 代表，象征着 stand up 站起来
start (doing) sth.开始（做）某事 start to do sth.开始做某事 start with 以…开始
stay + adj.保持…的状态 stay in bed 呆在床上 stay up 熬夜
step by step 一步步地 take…seriously
take…to… 把…带到… talk about 谈论
talk to sb.和某人讲话 talk with sb.和某人谈话 teach oneself 自学 teach sb.sth.教某人…
teach sb.to do sth.教某人做某事 tell jokes 讲笑话 tell lies 撒谎
tell sb.about sth.告诉某人关于某事 think about 考虑 walk through 穿过（内部） think back 回想 want sb.to do sth.想让某人做某事 think of 想起，认为 want to do sth.想做某事 think over 仔细考虑 warn sb.about sth.就某事警告某人
warn sb.not to do sth.thousands of 数千
警告某人不要做某事 throughout the world 遍及全世界
warn sb.to do sth.告诫某人去做某事 throw about 乱扔
wash away 冲走 throw around 乱扔
throw at 朝…扔东西 wash clothes 洗衣服 throw away 扔掉 waste time / money doing sth.throw…at… 朝…扔… 浪费时间，金钱做某事 provide sth.for sb.给某人提供某物 pull down 拆毁 put away sth.把…收起来 put down 放下 put off (doing) sth.推迟（做）某事 put on 穿上 put out 扑灭 put up 张贴 put…into… 把…放进… quite a lot 十分，相当 raise money 筹钱 realize one’s dream 实现某人梦想 realize that 认识到… receive / get an education 接受教育 receive a letter 收到来信 recite a poem 背诗 refer to 指的是 refuse to do sth.拒绝做某事 regard…as… 把…当做… regret doing sth.后悔做了某事 regret to do sth.后悔，遗憾做某事 relax oneself 放松某人自己 relay race 赛跑 remember doing sth.记得做过了某事remember to do sth.记得去做某事 reply to 回复 require sb.to do sth.要求某人做某事 return to 返回 return…to… 把…归还给… ride a bike / ride bikes 骑自行车 right after 在…之后…马上… right away 立刻，马上 right now 立刻，马上 ring sb.up 给某人打电话 run away 逃跑 run into 撞上… rush hour 高峰时间 rush into 冲进… rush out of 冲出… save energy 节约能源，能量 save money 省钱 save one’s life 救某人的命 save time 节约时间
seem to do sth.似乎… sell out 卖光 send / mail / post an e-mail 寄电邮 send a letter 寄信 send a meage 发送信息 send to 送到… send up 发射 send…to… 把…送到… set an example to 向…树立榜样 set free 释放 set off 出发 set the table 摆桌子 set up 建立，成立 shake hands 握手 shake head 摇头 share…with… 和…分享… shout at 向…大叫 show sb.around 带领某人四处参观 show sth.to sb.把…拿给…看 shut up 闭嘴 since thensing a song 唱歌 Sit down 坐下 slow down 降速 smile at 对…微笑，笑对… so far 到目前为止 so many 如此多的（可数名词） so much 如此多的（不可数名词） so that 以至于 so…that… 如此…以至于… soft drink 软饮料 soft music 轻音乐 soft sleeper 软卧 soil pollution 土壤污染 solar power 太阳能 solar system 太阳系 solve the problem 解决问题 some day 总有一天 sooner or later 迟早 sorts of 数种 speak to 和某人讲话（电话用语） spend time / money (in) doing sth.
花时间，金钱做某事 step on 踩在
tell sb.to do sth.让某人做某事 throw…into… 把…扔进… watch TV 看电视 stick to (doing) sth.坚持（做）某事 tell sth.to sb.把某事告诉给某人 tidy one’s room 打扫某人房间 watch / see movies 看电影 stop doing sth.停止做某事
tell stories 讲故事
tie…to… 把…系到… water pollution 水污染 stop to do sth.停下手中的事来做… Thank goodne! 谢天谢地
to one’s joy 令某人高兴的是 water the flowers 浇花 stop…from doing sth.阻止…做某事 thank sb.for doing sth.谢某人做某事 to one’s sadne 令某人悲伤的是 welcome to 欢迎到… succeed in doing sth.成功做某事 thanks to 多亏了，感谢… to one’s surprise 令某人吃惊的是 what about …怎么样 such as 例如
That’s all right.没关系 too many 太多（可数名词） what do you think of 你认为…怎么样 such…that… 如此的…以至于… That’s all.就这些
too much 太多（不可数名词） what else 还有呢 supply sth.to sb.给某人提供某物 That’s OK.没关系，不客气
tourist attractions 名胜 what time 什么时间 surf the Internet 上网冲浪 the answer to the question 问题的答案 trade…with… 和…交易… wipe out 消灭 sweep the floor 扫地 the chance to do sth.做某事的机会 traffic lights 交通灯 wish sb.n./ adj.祝福某人… table manners 餐桌礼仪
the custom to do sth.做某事的习俗 traffic rules 交通法规 wish sb.to do sth.希望某人做某事 take / follow one’s advice 采纳某人建议 the day after tomorrow 后天 translate…into… 把…翻译成… wish to do sth.希望去做某事 take a bath 洗澡 the day before yesterday 前天 travel around 周游 with one’s eyes 用某人的眼镜 take a breath 呼吸 the field of …的领域 treasure sb./ sth.珍惜… with one’s help 在某人的帮助下 take a rest 休息
the height of …的高度 treat…as… 把…当做… With pleasure.很乐意 take a shower 洗澡，淋浴 the high jump 跳高
try on 试穿 with the development of 随着…的发展 take an active part in 积极参加 the key to the answer 问题的答案 try one’s best to do sth.尽最大努力做某事 with the help of 在…的帮助下
take away 拿走
the key to the door 门的钥匙
try out 试验，尝试
with the purpose of 带着…的目的 take care of 关心，照顾 the key to the question 问题的答案 try to do sth.试着做某事
without doing sth.不用做某事 take drugs 吸毒 the license to do sth.做某事的执照 turn + color 变成某种颜色
work hard 努力工作 take in 吸收
the long jump 跳高
turn down 调小音量
work hard at 在某方面，事上努力工作 Take it easy.别紧张，放松 the method to do sth.做某事的方法 turn left 朝左转
work on 从事…的工作 take measures to do sth.the name of …的名字 turn off 关掉
worn out 穿破 take notes 记笔记 the next day 下一天
turn on 打开（水，电…）
worry about 担心 take off 脱掉，起飞
the number of …的数量（总体，单数） turn to 翻到，向…求助
worth the efforts 努力是值得的 take one’s advice / suggestions the path to succe 通往成功的路 turn up 调大音量
would like to do sth.想做某事 take one’s breath 屏住呼吸 the price of …的价格 types of 数种…
would rather do sth.than do sth.take one’s place 取代某人位子 the reason why …的原因 up and down 上上下下
宁可做某事也不做某事 take one’s temperature 量体温 the rest 剩余的，剩下的 up to now 到目前为止
write a letter 写信 take out 拿出 the rest of …剩余的
use one’s head 动脑筋
write an e-mail 写电邮 take part in 参加 the right to do sth.做某事的权利 use sth.to do sth.用某物做某事
write down 写下 take photos 照相 the same as 和…一样
used to do sth.曾经做某事
write to sb.给某人写信 take pictures 照相 The same to you.你也一样 very much 很，非常
You bet! 的确 take pills 吃药片
the symbol of …的象征 volunteer to do sth.志愿做某事 take pride in 以…为自豪
the ticket to …的票
wait a moment 等一下 take sb.time to do sth.花某人时间做… the way/method to do sth.做某事方法 wait for 等待…
take the chance 抓住机会 the weight of …的重量
wake sb.up 弄醒某人 take the place of 取代…
there be sb./ sth.doing sth.
take the place of sb.to do sth.
有某人，某物正在做某事 walk a pet dog 遛狗
取代某人去做某事
There’s no doubt that 毫无疑问 walk acro 穿过（表面） take turns to do sth.轮流做某事 There’s no need to do sth.没必要做某事 walk along 沿着…走 take up 占据…（时间，空间）
There’s no use doing sth.做某事没用 walk around 围着…转 walk on 踩在，在…上面走
推荐第5篇：仁爱版英语七年级下册全册教案
Unit 5 Our School Life Topic 1 How do you usually come to school? Section A needs 1 period.Section A需用1课时。
The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.(1) Learn some means of transportation: by bike, by subway, by bus, on foot, by plane, by car, by train, by ship, by boat (2) Learn other new words and phrases: gate, the same to, come on, go to school, Ms., grandmother, group 2.Learn adverbs of frequency: often, usually, always 3.Review the present simple tense.—Do you often come to school by bike? —Yes.I do./No, I don’t.
4.Talk about how to go to school.—How do you usually come to school? —I usually come to school by subway./I always come to school by bus.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 录音机/交通工具的模型/图片
Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:5分钟) 复习日常用语并呈现1a内容。 Ⅳ.疑点探究
本课我们学习了介词by表示“用，靠；通过，借助于(方式、手段)”时的用法。如：by car, by plane, by ship等。
用来表示交通方式的介词还有in和on。如：in a car, on a bus等。此时交通工具前要加限定词。但on foot意为“步行；走”。foot前不需任何限定词，foot也不能用复数。(建议：教师可在总结课上或练习课上补充。) Section B needs 1 period.Section B需用1课时。
The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands 目标要求 1.Learn some new words and phrases: weekday, early, bird, catch, walk, ride, park, do (one’s) homework, watch TV, television 2.(1)Go on learning adverbs of frequency: seldom, never, sometimes (2)Review the present simple tense.I always get up at about six o’clock.Li Xiang often comes to school by bike.3.Go on learning adverbs of frequency and means of transportation in different expreions.(1) I seldom walk to school.I never go to school by subway.(2) —How does Maria go home? —She sometimes goes home by subway./ She sometimes takes the subway home.4.Encourage the students to be diligent.The early bird catches the worm.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具
Section C needs 1 period.Section C需用1课时。
The main activities are 1a, 2 and 3.本课重点活动是1a, 2和3。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.(1) Learn other words of frequency: once, twice (2) Learn other new words and phrases: life, American, or, few, have lunch, at school, day, have a rest, play, basketball, football, go swimming, and so on, ball, more, talk, game, listen to, music, read, library, must, first, week, every 2.Learn how to expre frequency.How often do you go to the library? Once/Twice/Three times a week./Very often./Every day./Seldom … 3.Talk about the daily activities.play soccer, play basketball, read books, go swimming, go fishing, listen to music, watch TV, do one’s homework, go to the park, meet friends, cook, go to the zoo 4.Learn about the differences of the school life between American students and Chinese students.Topic 2 He is running on the playground.Section A needs 1~2 periods.Section A需用1~2课时。
The main activities are 1a, 2a and 3.本课重点活动是1a, 2a和3。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.(1) Learn the names of school buildings: playground, gym, dormitory, lab, computer room, dining hall, claroom building, swimming pool (2) Learn other new words: make, card, boring, soon, run, dance, sleep, clean 2.Learn the present continuous tense.What are you doing now? I’m making cards.
What is Maria doing now? She is reading in the library.Are you watching TV? Yes, I am./No, I’m not.
Is Kangkang reading in the library? Yes, he is./No, he isn’t.
The main activities are 1a, 2a and 2b.本课重点活动是1a, 2a和2b。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.Learn some new words and phrases: borrow, a few, of course, use, look for, shelf, keep, return, on time, pleasure, post, bye-bye, another, Lost and Found, purse, money, else, picture, put on 2.Go on learning the present continuous tense.Many students are using them, and they are doing better in English now.I’m looking for my purse.
3.Learn how to borrow things.Excuse me, may I borrow a few Ren’ai Project English workbooks? How long can I keep them? You must return them on time.4.Learn how to write Lost and Found.(1)look for与find的用法：
look for意思是“寻找”, 强调“找”的动作。find是及物动词, 意思是“找到, 发现”, 强调“找”的结果, 后跟宾语。如：
I can’t find my purse.我找不到钱包了。
Please look for it in your bag.I think you can find it.请在你的包里找一下, 我想你能找到它。
(2)other与else的区别：
other修饰名词，位于名词之前。如：
What’s that in your other hand? 你另一只手里拿的是什么？
else修饰不定代词、疑问代词或疑问副词，必须位于这些词之后。如： I have nothing else to say.我没有其他要说的了。 What else do I need to do? 我还要做其他的什么事情吗？ Section C needs 1 period.Section C需用1课时。 The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.Learn other new words and phrases: show sb.around, sit, write, at the back of, draw 2.Review the present continuous tense.What is/are… doing? Is/Are…?
The boy is drawing pictures.He isn’t making cards.
3.Review the names of school buildings.4.Talk about everyday activities.Encourage the students to take part in various kinds of activities actively.Topic 3 My school life is very interesting.Section A needs 1~2 periods.Section A需用1~2课时。 The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.(1)Learn days of the week: Wednesday, Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, Friday (2)Learn subjects: physics, geography, P.E., art, math, science, history, biology, politics (3)Learn other new words and phrases: today, meeting, outdoor activity, leon, learn 2.Learn Wh-questions.What day is it today? What time does the cla begin? 3.Talk about subjects and timetables.What cla are they having? They are having a music cla.What time is it over? At a quarter to eleven.How many leons does he have every weekday? What leons does he have on Wednesdays? How often does he do outdoor activities? Ⅳ.疑点探究
1.Sunday意为“星期日，星期天”。在英国它被看做是一周的最后一天，在美国则被看做是一周的第一天。
2.cla指整个课堂, 包括老师讲授和学生听讲, 比如英语课，美术课等。 leon是课文本身, 范围非常小, 比如：Leon One第一课 Section B Section B needs 1 period.Section B需用1课时。
The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.(1)Learn some adjectives: easy, interesting, difficult (2)Learn other new words: which, subject, best, story 2.Talk about interests, likes and dislikes.You must like English very much.I don’t like it very much.
Which subject do you like best? I like history best.Why do you like it? Because it’s easy and interesting.Section C needs 1 period.Section C 需用1课时。 The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。 Ⅰ.Aims and demands目标要求
1.Learn some new words and phrases: friendly, other, news, attention, between, stamp, world, Saturday, from…to…, night, place, program 2.(1)Review subjects and school activities.
推荐第6篇：[英语]仁爱版七年级上英语全册教案
Unit 3 Getting Together Topic 1 Does he speak Chinese? Section A The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn some new words and phrases: could, tell, sure, speak, some, poor, with, help sb.with sth., problem, pet, often, want 2.Learn Present Simple to do: (1)—Do you come from the U.S.A.?—No, I don’t.(2)—Do you like Chinese?—Yes, I do.3.Ask for permiion and make requests: (1)—Excuse me, could you please tell me your name?—Sure.(2)—Could you help me with it?—No problem.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 录音机/幻灯片/教学挂图/铅笔/尺子/玩具猫/玩具狗/蒙眼布 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟) 通过复习描述体貌特征导入本课新知识，培养学生口头表达能力。 1.(教师按照座位链式提问，要求学生用Yes, I do./No, I don’t.快速作答。) (通过运用Do you have …? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.句型引出Do you have a pen pal?) T: Do you have a pen pal, S? 4 (板书并要求学生了解。) pen pal S: No, I don’t.T: Do you want a pen pal?S: Yes, I do.44 (板书并要求学生掌握。) want 2.(教师通过询问学生个人信息，导入新知识。) T: Excuse me.What’s your name, please? S: My name is … 5 T: How old are you? S: I’m … 5 T: Do you have an English name? S: Yes, I do.5 T: Could you please tell me your English name?S: …
5T: You can say “Sure.My English name is …”. (板书并要求学生掌握。) —Could you please tell me your …? —Sure.(教师示范) 1
T: Could you please tell me your age, S?6 S: Sure.I’m … 6 T: Could you please tell me your telephone number? S: Sure.It’s … 6(学生两人一组运用Could you please tell me …?句型询问个人信息。) 3.T: I’m an English teacher.I can speak English.Do you speak English after cla, S? 7
S: Yes, I do.(帮助学生回答。) 7(板书并要求学生掌握。)
speak T: Do you like it? (教师提示此处like作动词。) S: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.(帮助学生回答) 7(学生两人一组操练，运用Do you speak …?和Do you like …?句型及其肯定和否定回答。) 4.(教师请一个学生，用not good来引出poor一词。) T: Is your English good? S: No, it isn’t.I can speak some English, but my English isn’t very good.8 T: You can say “My English is poor.”
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
some poor S: My English is poor.Could you help me? 8 T: No problem.I can help you with it after cla. (板书并要求学生掌握。) No problem.help … with … T: S, do you like English?S: Yes, I do.99 T: Do you often speak English after cla?S: Yes, I do.T:Good! 9 (板书并要求学生掌握。)
often (通过以上的活动导入1a。)
Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:8分钟) 通过听力、教学挂图等形式呈现本课对话，让学生练习使用重要句型，培养学生的听、说能力。 1.(教师利用幻灯片展示问题。播放1a录音两遍。学生听录音并选择正确答案。) (1) Where does Jane come from? A.Japan.B.Canada.C.China.(2) Does Jane speak English? A.No, she doesn’t.B.Yes, she does.C.We don’t know. (3) Whose Chinese is poor? A.Jane’s.B.The boy’s.C.Maria’s.(核对答案。) 2.(再次播放
1a
录音，学生听并且跟读，注意语音语调。) 3.(教师将全班学生分成两组，分角色朗读1a。) 4.(展示1a教学挂图，要求学生两人一组运用下列句型，可适当发挥，操练1a的对话，完成1b。) (1)Could you please …?(2)Sure.(3)Do you like English?(4)Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.(5)Could you help me with my …?(6)No problem.(教师巡回作指导，然后挑出表现比较好的一组登台表演。) 2
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟) 通过复述对话、做游戏等活动，进一步巩固本课所学知识，培养学生合作精神，增强他们的集体荣誉感，培养学生综合运用语言的能力。 1.(教师利用幻灯片出示练习题，要求学生根据1a内容填空。以此展示复述范本。)
The girl’s name is Jane.She comes from Canada.She speaks English.Jane likes Chinese but her Chinese is poor.Li Xiang can help her with her Chinese.(画线部分是要填的词) 2.(利用幻灯片，呈现1a中一些关键词，帮助学生学会从对话中提取重要信息，学会复述。要求至少用三句话来介绍Jane的情况。教师将学生分组，先在小组内进行，然后各小组选派代表向大家汇报。) come from, speak English, like Chinese, poor, help … with … 3.(举行“小组对话大赛”，巩固所学句型。教师先做示范，然后各小组操练。评出优胜组。) T: Excuse me, could you please tell me your name? S: Sure.My name is … 1 T: Do you come from the U.S.A.? S: No, I don’t.I come from … 1 T: Do you like English? S: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.1… 4.(学生两人一组合作完成1c。核对答案后请两三组学生练习对话。) 5.(做游戏。) (方案一) (1)(请四名学生上讲台，老师拿出四件物品给全班学生看，例如：铅笔、尺子、玩具猫和玩具狗。然后快速分给讲台上的四名学生，让他们把物品放在背后，注意不要让下面的学生看见谁拿到了什么。) (2)(老师问其中的一名学生：Do you have …?并故意问错，学生回答：No, I don’t.老师进而引导其他学生用Do you have …?句型提问讲台上的学生，被问到的学生作出回答，直到台下有学生猜对。) (方案二) (五个人一小组练习。四件物品摆在桌前。其中一人A看过物品后，蒙住眼睛，另外四个人则各拿其中一样物品，A解开蒙眼布，用Do you have …?句型猜四个人手中各拿什么物品。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟) 通过练习找笔友，激发学生学习兴趣，提高学生综合运用语言的能力。
1.(做“问答接龙”游戏。从教师开始问第一排第一个学生，第一个学生回答后再问第二个学生，第二个学生回答后再问第三个学生，以此类推。) 2.(根据自己的情况回答2a的问题，看谁可以做李伟的笔友。) (两分钟后询问几个学生的答案，看他们是否能成为李伟的笔友。) T: Do you like pets? (板书并要求学生掌握。) pet 3.(三人一组帮助李伟找笔友，一同学分别询问另两名同学，另两名同学回答。) 4.(自己找笔友，三人一组，一同学向另外两名同学发问，看他们是否可以成为学习上的笔友。完成2b。) Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:7分钟) 通过编对话让学生学以致用，通过诗歌吟唱活动培养学生学习兴趣，使他们能积极主动地参与学习活动，提高合作意识和探究精神。 1.(假设你的英语成绩不好，你想找一个网友帮助你，两人一组编对话。然后抽几组进行表演。) 2.(教师帮助学生完成3。教师打节拍，或者放录音，让学生有节奏地跟读。) 3.Homework: 3
自编一个对话，运用下面句型：
(1)Could you please …?(2)Sure.(3)Do you …?Yes, I do./No, I don’t.(4)No problem.板书设计： Does he speak Chinese? Section A speak —Could you please tell me your …? No problem.—Sure.help … with … —Do you …? —Yes, I do./No, I don’t. Section B
The main activities are 1a and 3.本课重点活动是1a和3。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn some new words:live, say, visit, great, wall 2.Learn some questions and answers with does: (1)—Does he speak Chinese—Yes, he does./ No, he doesn’t.He speaks English.(2)—What does he say in the letter?—He wants to visit the Great Wall.3.Learn some useful sentences: (1)—Who is the letter from?—It’s from my pen pal, Sam.(2)—Is the letter in English?—Yes, it is.(3)—Where does he live?—He lives in England.(4)Kangkang knows me.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/教学挂图/录音机/幻灯片/若干个装有信件的信封/小黑板 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟) 以问题为线索，引出单词和话题，培养学生的语言表达能力。 1.(检查作业。教师请学生登台表演上节课的家庭作业。) T: Now, I’ll check your homework.SS, please, come to the front and perform your dialog.
12、2.(师生对话。引入并运用China和Chinese。) T: I come from China.I am Chinese.Ss: We come from China.We’re Chinese.(教师提问一名学生。) T: Where do you come from, S? 3S:I come from China.3 T: Do you speak Chinese? S:Yes, I do.3 (学生两人一组互相问答。) (教师可以穿插讲解“吉鸿昌爱国”的故事，培养学生的爱国主义情感，增强“爱国意识”。解放前，外国人都看不起我们中国人，说我们是“东亚病夫”。当时在国外，有的中国人都不敢承认自己是中国人，但吉鸿昌到国外后，勇敢地对外国人说自己是中国人，并且自制了一个纸牌挂在胸前，上面用英语写道：I am Chinese!) 3.(教师出示一幅长城的图片。) T: Can you say it in English? S:Yes, the Great Wall.(教师帮助回答。)
4 T: Where is it? S:It’s in China.4 T: Do you live in China? S:Yes, I do.(教师帮助回答。) 4 4
T: Is China great?
S: Yes, it is.4 (板书并要求学生掌握say, wall, live, great；理解the Great Wall。) say, wall, the Great Wall, live, great 4.(教师接着出示第二幅图片。) T: Do you like the Great Wall? S:Yes, I do.5 T: Do you want to visit the Great Wall? S:Yes, I do.5(板书并要求学生掌握。) visit (教师让学生两人一组，运用所呈现的生词编对话。) 5.(教师介绍S的情况，然后让学生根据介绍回答问题。) 5
T: Slives in China.He/She likes the Great Wall.He/She wants to visit the Great Wall.5 (教师请另一位学生，根据这段话回答问题。) (通过以上活动导入1a。)
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:8分钟) 根据1a的教学挂图回答问题，练习本课基本句型，引出对话内容。培养学生听说能力和阅读能力。 1.(教师呈现1a的教学挂图，与学生谈论。) (教师播放1a录音，让学生听并回答Who is the letter from?) Who is the letter from? (核对答案。) 2.(教师再播放一遍1a录音，要求学生根据1a判断正(T)误(F)。)
(幻灯片展示试题。) (1)Sam is Kangkang’s pen pal.( ) (2)Sam speaks Chinese.( ) (3)Sam says he wants to visit the Great Wall.( ) (核对答案。) 3.(分角色朗读对话，进一步理解对话内容。教师板书重点句子和短语并解释，要求掌握。)
(1)speak+语言名称=say … in+语言名称
(2)live in …
(3)in the letter (4)—What does he say in the letter? —He wants to visit the Great Wall.4.(根据1a内容，教师随机提问学生，并核对答案，完成1a。) 5.(双人小组活动。学生独自完成1b，然后同桌分角色表演1b对话。)
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:7分钟) 模仿1a，1b编对话，让学生学以致用，培养学生综合运用语言的能力。 1.(教师利用幻灯片呈现习题，要求学生根据对话内容填写所缺单词，每空一词。) S: What’s that in English? 1 5
S: It’s a letter.2S: Is it yours? 1S: Yes, it’s mine.2S: Who is it from? 1S: It’s from my pen pal, Tom.2S: Does he speak Chinese? 1S: No, he doesn’t.He speaks English.2S: What does he say in the letter? 1S: He wants to visit China.2(画线部分是要填的词。) 2.(教师把事先准备好的信封发给各小组，然后根据信封及信的内容两人一组进行对话练习。对话应包括以下句型：) T: Let’s make a dialog in pairs with the following sentences.(1)—Who is the letter from?—It’s from … (2)—Where does he/she come from?—He/She comes from … (3)—What does he/she say in the letter?—He/She wants to … (教师挑选两组学生表演，掌声鼓励。) 3.(双人活动。同桌对话，了解对方笔友的情况。要求运用以下幻灯片中的句型。)
(1) Is it a boy or a girl? (2)
It’s a boy/girl.
(3) Does he/she come from …?
(4) Yes, …
does./No, … doesn’t.(5) Does he/she live in China? (6) Yes, … does./No, … doesn’t.(7) Does he/she like China? (8) Yes, … does./No, … doesn’t. Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟) 在不同情景中练习目标语言，展开任务型活动，学以致用，锻炼学生合作能力。 1.(教师播放
2录音，学生听后回答问题，完成2，核对答案。)
T: Listen to the tape of 2 and answer the following questions.Then check the answers.2.(教师将2的听力材料用幻灯片或小黑板展示出来，然后让学生两人一组根据内容编对话。)
T: Please work in pairs to make a dialog according to the sentences on the blackboard.And then act it out.3.(教师引导学生观察
3中的句子，并归纳句子的规律——当主语是第三人称单数时，谓语动词原形后加(e)s。) T: Please observe the sentences in 3 and find out the rules of verbs changing in the third single personal pronouns.(板书下列内容并解释。) Kangkang→knows He→lives/helps/wants She→speaks … 4.(教师播放3录音，让学生跟读，练习(e)s的读音。完成3。)
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:10分钟) 通过练习动词第三人称单数的读音规则及其一般疑问句的问答，培养学生观察探究能力。 1.(教师鼓励学生探究“动词第三人称单数的读音”，并总结。)
(小黑板展示下列内容。)
lives, speaks, spells, phones, knows, does, hands, comes, looks, gives, likes, drees,
thinks, guees, finds, helps, tells, meets, wants, visits 6
(教师先领着学生读一遍，要求学生边读边注意词尾s的发音。接着，教师将学生分组，并为各小组命名，如先锋队、雄鹰队、立志队等，引发学生的兴趣。然后，为各小组明确共同目标，即归纳出-s在动词后的读音规律。每个成员针对词尾s的不同读音进行观察，发现规律并进行归纳总结。接下来，组内成员互相补充，力图达到全面、准确。各组选出小组发言人进行汇报，其他各组学生均可补充发言。最后由教师总结，再按读音将幻灯片上的词分类。) 2.(问答接龙。参照4，教师让学生八人一组，第一位同学用Do you
…?向第二位同学提问，第二位同学用
Yes, I do./No, I don’t.回答，并用Does he/she …?向第三位同学提问，而第三位同学又用Yes, he/she does./No, he/she doesn’t.回答并向第四位同学提问。以此类推，每位同学提问时要用到盒子里不同动词，完成4。) Example: S: Do you have a ruler? 1 S: Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Does your friend like China? 2 S: Yes, … does./No, … doesn’t.Does … want …? 3 … 3.Homework: (1)根据1a内容写一段话。(四十个单词左右) Example: This is a letter in English.It’s from Sam.Sam is Kangkang’s pen pal.Kangkang lives in China.Sam lives in England.In Sam’s letter, he says he wants to visit the Great Wall.(2)制作卡片，把人称代词的主格宾格分别写在卡片上。 板书设计： Does he speak Chinese? Section B say … in English —Who is the letter from? =speak English —It’s from … live in … —Does he speak Chinese? the Great Wall —Yes, he does./No, he doesn’t.want to visit … —What does he say in the letter? —He wants to visit the Great Wall. Section C The main activities are 1a and 3a.本课重点活动是1a和3a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: many, lot, a lot, all, not … at all, so, study, each other, little, a little, them, very, much, very much 2.Review personal pronouns.3.Go on learning some questions and answers with do/does.4.Expre preferences: (1)—Do you like …?—Yes, I like it a little/very much/a lot.—No, I don’t like it at all.(2)—Does he/she like …? —Yes, he/she likes it a little/very much/a lot.—No, he/she doesn’t like it at all.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 录音机/幻灯片/小黑板/实物或图片/学生自制卡片 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟) 通过调查学生对英语和语文的喜欢程度，引出本课新单词，培养学生的语言表达能力。 1.(让几名学生朗读上节课布置的家庭作业：根据1a内容改编的短文。) 2.(做调查，引出本课新单词，教师在黑板上画出三幅图。) 7
very much like … like … a little don’t like … at all
a lot (板书并要求学生掌握。) a little, very much, a lot, not … at all T: Do you like English, S?S:Yes, I like it very much.11 T: Do you like Chinese?S:No, I don’t like it at all.1 T: Do you like English, S?S:No, I don’t like it at all.22 T: Do you like Chinese?S:Yes, I like it a little.2 T: Do you like English, S?S:No, I don’t like it at all.33 T: Do you like Chinese?S:Yes, I like it a lot.3 T: Can you often help them study Chinese? (指向S和S。) S:Yes, I can.123 T: Can you often help them study English, S?S:Yes, I can.11 (板书并要求学生掌握。) them, study T: We have many good friends, so we should help each other. (板书并要求学生掌握。) many, so, each other T: I have a good friend.Her name is Jane.Do you want to know something about her? Please follow me.(导入1a的学习。) Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:10分钟) 通过听、说、读等形式多样的活动，培养学生口头交际能力、阅读能力及观察、分析问题的能力。
1.教师让学生略读课文1a并回答问题：
(1) Are Jane and I clamates?
(2) Where does Jane come from? (3) Do many students in our cla like English? (4) Who often help me study English? 2.(学生再读1a，并画出文中的关键词，然后完成1b。核对答案。) 3.(播放1a录音，让学生跟读，注意语音语调。) 4.(教师利用幻灯片将文中的关键词展示出来，并简要讲解语言点。)
friend, come from, speak, in the same cla, many students, a lot, not … at all, poor,
help, Chinese, help each other 5.(要求学生利用幻灯片上的关键词，试着复述课文。先在小组内进行，然后各小组推选一名学生向全班复述。) Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:8分钟) 通过练习喜好的表达，培养学生的口头表达能力和交际能力。 1.(播放3a录音，让学生听，然后操练喜欢和不喜欢的问句及其答语。) (教师用幻灯片或小黑板将下列内容呈现出来。) (1)—Do you like …? —Yes, I like … a little/very much/a lot.(2)—Does he/she like …? —No, he/she doesn’t like … at all.(教师让两位学生S和S到台前。) 12T: S, do you like English? 1S: Yes, I like it very much./ No, I don’t like it at all.1T: S, does Slike English? 21 8
S: Yes, he/she likes it a lot./ No, he/she doesn’t like it at all.2(学生三人一组，仿照上面对话进行操练。然后请几组学生表演，掌声鼓励。) 2.(做句型练习活动，操练very much/a lot, a little和not … at all。) 具体操作：
(1)教师利用幻灯片或小黑板展示苹果的图片，图片旁画有
或
图标；将全班同学分为两人组和三人组若干。
(2)学生看见两个 图标说very much/a lot，看见一个 图标说a little,看见 图标说not … at all。组内其他同学用前一个同学说出的词组各说一个相应的句子。 Example: (两人一组) S: a little.S: I like apples a little.34 (三人一组) S: very much/ a lot.S: I like apples very much.S: I like apples a lot.567(三人一组) S: not … at all.S: I don’t like apples at all.S: He/She doesn’t like apples at all.8910(教师用同样的方法展示其他已学食物的图片供同学们练习。) 3.(教师播放3b录音两遍，让学生完成3b，并核对答案。)
Step 4 Practice 第四步
练习(时间:7分钟) 讲解人称代词主格和宾格的用法，完成作业，使目标语言得到强化操练。 1.(教师挑选含有人称代词主格和宾格的句子，板书并作简单讲解。要求学生掌握画线部分代词的用法。) She often helps me with it.I help her study Chinese.He wants to visit the Great Wall.Could you help me with it? 2.(两人一组，A说人称代词的主格，B说宾格，轮流进行，然后让学生做2。核对答案，完成2。) 3.(学生两人一组朗读2中对话。) Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:10分钟) 通过做游戏，巩固人称代词主格和宾格的用法，培养学生合作精神，激发学生的学习兴趣。 1.(教师播放4录音，师生共唱歌曲“The
more we get together.”完成4。) 2.(做游戏：找朋友，学生拿出准备好的人称代词卡片。) (1)(教师说“主格”，学生把所有人称代词的主格拿出来。) (2)(教师说出一个人称代词，学生找出这个人称代词和它的主格或宾格形式。)
(3)(教师指定学生拿出相应的人称代词站在黑板前，按要求找朋友。)
For example: ①(“第一人称主格”，手拿第一人称主格的就出列。) ②(“第三人称主格和宾格”，手拿第三人称主格和宾格的就出列。)
(4)(教师在黑板上写出一些动词，让学生用手中的卡片完成句子，并翻译。) For example: They help me with English.(他们在英语方面帮助我。)
He gives you some books.(他给你一些书。)
3.Homework： 根据1a
内容写一篇短文介绍自己的朋友，题目是
My friend，词数在四十个左右。 板书设计： Does he speak Chinese? Section C like … a little I help her study Chinese. like … very much/a lot Do you like …? 9
don’t like … at all Yes, I like it a little/very much/a lot.No, I don’t like it at all.主格：I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they Does he/she like …? 宾格：me, you, him, her, it, us, you, them Yes, he/she likes it a little/very much/a lot.
No, he/she doesn’t like it at all.
Section The main activities are 1, 2a and 4.本课重点活动是
D
1, 2a和4。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn the phonetics:/tr/, /dr/, /ts/, /dz/ 2.Learn some new words and a phrase:home, at home, its, dog, any, of 3.(1)Review questions and answers with do/does: ①—Do you want a pen pal?—Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.②—Does he speak Chinese?—Yes, he does./ No, he doesn’t.
(2)Review the personal pronouns, including subject pronouns and object pronouns.4.Review the useful expreions: (1)—Excuse me, could you please tell me your name?—Sure.My name is Jane.(2)—Could you help me with it?—No problem.(3)—Do you like English?—Yes, I like it very much/a lot/a little.—No, I don’t like it at all.
Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 信/玩具/录音机/小黑板/幻灯片/图片 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:7分钟) 复习表达喜欢与不喜欢，导入本课新词，培养学生口头表达能力。 1.(师生对话，复习本单元主要句型。) T: Excuse me, could you please tell me your name? S:Sure.My name is … 1 T: Do you come from Shandong? S:No, I don’t.I come from Chongqing.1 T: Who’s the letter from?(学生手里有一封信。) S:It’s from my pen pal, Sam.1 T: Where’s Sam from? S:He’s from England.1 T: Does he like Chinese? S:Yes, he does.But his Chinese is poor.1 T: Is the letter in English? S:Yes, it is.1 T: Do you like English? S:Yes, I do.But my English is poor.1 T: Could you help him with his Chinese? S: No problem.He helps me study English and I help him study Chinese.We can help each other.1 T: Then what does he say in the letter? S:He says he likes China very much and he wants to visit the Great Wall.1 T: Oh, that’s good.We are glad to have him here.2.(教师拿出一个玩具狗，引出本课新单词。) T: What’s this? 10 S:It’s a dog.(帮助学生回答。) 2 (板书并要求学生掌握。) dog T: Do you like a dog? S:Yes, I like dogs very much.2 T: Do you have a dog? S:Yes, I do.2 T: What is the name of your dog? S:Its name is Huanhuan.2 (板书并解释its与it’s的含义与写法，要求学生掌握。) of, its T: I have a pet cat at home.Its name is Mimi.Do you have any cats at home? S:No, I don’t.I don’t like cats at all.2 (板书并要求学生掌握。) at home, any T: S has a pet dog.Its name is Huanhuan.He likes it very much.He doesn’t like cats at all, so he doesn’t have a pet 2cat.Is Zhou Lan’s pet a dog? Does she like her pet? Now, please follow me. Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:10
分钟)
2a听录音，做阅读理解，培养学生听、说、读的能力。 1.(播放录音，让学生回答问题：(1) Is Zhou Lan’s pet a dog? (2) Does she like her pet?) 2.(让学生阅读2a，回答小黑板上的问题。)
(出示小黑板上的练习题。) (1)What pet do I have at home? A.A dog.B.A cat.C.None.(2)My pet’s name is .A.Meimei B.Kitty C.Huanhuan (3)How do I like Kitty? A.A little.B.Very much.C.Not … at all.(4)Zhou Lan’s pet is .A.a dog B.a cat C.a toy (5)Does Zhou Lan like Tommy? A.No, she doesn’t.B.Yes, she does.C.We don’t know.(核对答案。) 3.(学生朗读课文，判断正误，完成2a。) Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟) 听录音并跟读，掌握四个辅音音素的发音。模仿课文，练习写作，培养学生的书面表达能力。 1.(讨论宠物，完成2b。) T: Do you have a pet?S:Yes, I do.1 T: What is your pet?S:It’s a dog.1 T: What’s its name?S:Its name is Linlin.1 T: What color is it?S:It is white.1 T: Does it have long legs?S:Yes, it does.1 T: Does it have long ears.S:Yes, it does.1 T: Does your friend Jack have a pet dog?S:No, he doesn’t.He doesn’t like pets at all.1(教师要求学生根据对话内容改写成一段文章。) Example: 11
I have a pet dog.It is white.Its name is Linlin.I like it very much.It has four long legs.Its ears are long.My friend Jack doesn’t have pet dogs.He doesn’t like pets at all.2.(三人一组讨论宠物，并把讨论内容转述出来。) T: Now, please discu your pets with your clamates and retell the result.(两分钟后挑几个学生讲述，鼓励优秀者。) 3.(学习/tr/和/dr/这一对音素。教师板书。) tree train
trousers (让学生自己读、观察、体会并总结画线部分的读音。教师板书。) tr — /tr/ (教师在/tr/的基础上自然引出/dr/。板书。) /dr/ dre drink driver (以同样方法学习/ts/和/dz/这对音素。) 4.(教师用小黑板呈现出含有/tr/, /dr/, /ts/和/dz/四个音素的单词，检验学生的拼读能力。) 5.(教师播放1录音，让学生跟读。完成1。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:11分钟) 复习人称代词主格和宾格及本话题重点句型，培养学生综合运用语言知识的能力。 1.(教师将人称代词的主格和宾格利用幻灯片呈现出来。领读并简单说明主格与宾格的用法和区别。)
I—me; you—you; he—him; she—her; it—it; we—us; you—you; they—them (然后两人一组，一个学生说主格或宾格，另一个学生说其相应的宾格或主格。) 2.(教师将所有人称代词主格、宾格的顺序打乱并将其板书在黑板上，让学生“找朋友”。) Find friends: me he her you it we they him you it I us them she (让一个学生在黑板上连线。核对答案。) 3.(教师用小黑板出示下边的练习，要求学生根据括号内的汉语写出英文，完成句子。填对一个词，该同学加一分。)
(1) My English is poor, so (她) often helps (我).(2) Where do (你们) live? (我们) live in Beijing.(3) I don’t know (他们).(4) He wants (我们) to go to his home.(5) What is (它)? (它) is a jacket.(核对答案后，让学生齐读练习并奖励得分高的学生。) 4.(出示幻灯片，要求学生根据范例口头做句型转换。改对一个句子加两分。) Change the following sentences according to the example.Example: He speaks Chinese.→Does he speak Chinese? Yes, he does./No, he doesn’t.→He doesn’t speak Chinese. (1) I have a pen pal.(2) Li Hong likes oranges a lot.(3) They often help Wang Fei.(4) Jane wants to visit China.(5) Your pet has blue eyes.(练习完毕，教师点评并奖励得分高的学生。) 5.(教师播放3a录音，学生跟读，并模仿语音语调，完成3a。) 12
播放3b录音，让学生跟读，然后教师用小黑板呈现下面的内容。)
Complete the dialog: —Excuse me, could you please tell me your name? —Sure.My name is Zhang Lan.—Where do you come from?/Where are you from? —I come from Shanghai./I’m from Shanghai.—Do you like English? —Yes, I like it very much.And you? —No, I don’t like it at all, so my English is poor.—You should(应该) learn(学习) English well.—Yes, you’re right.Could you please help me with my English? —No problem.(以上画线句子是学生要填的句子。学生两人一组操练上面的对话。完成3b。) Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:7分钟) 组织 6.(“英语角”活动，做调查报告和命题作文，锻炼学生综合运用能力和探究能力，体现学以致用原则。 1.(教师用图片展示一个关于英语角的通知，让学生根据通知内容展开讨论。)
Welcome to English Corner
Time: 6:00 p.m.Place: Playground(操场) Topic(话题): Like English or not Host: Cla 2, Grade 7 (要求：在活动中充分练习本话题中所学的重点句式及语言点。) Example: T: Excuse me, could you please tell me your English name? S: Sure.… 1 T: Do you like English? S: Yes, I like it very much.1 T: My English is poor.Could you help me? S: No problem.1… (教师示范后，将每个英语小组设置为English Corner，进行操练。完成4（1）。) 2.Homework: Write a paage about one of the topics in 4(2).Finish 4(3).板书设计： Does he speak Chinese? Section D tr—/tr/ dr—/dr/ me he her you it we they ts /ts/ tes him you it I us them she —/dz/ ds Topic 2 What does your mother do? Section A The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 13
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.(1) Learn some words about jobs:doctor, worker, driver, farmer, cook, nurse (2) Learn some other new words and a phrase:kid, glad, seat, have a seat, mother, father, parent, office 2.(1)Talk about jobs: ①—What does your mother do?—She is a teacher.②—What do your parents do?—They are both office workers.(2)Talk about greetings and introductions: ①—Glad to meet you.—Glad to meet you, too.②Maria, this is my mom.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 名词卡片/人称代词卡片/图片/教学挂图/录音机/幻灯片/小黑板 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟) 通过做游戏和师生问答等形式，复习上个话题的重点知识，并导入新课。 1.(问答游戏。复习Do you like …?句型及答语。) (1)把学生分成六人一组，每组准备
七、八张名词卡片。(2)第一个学生先抽一张卡片，其他学生一起问：Do you like …?让这位学生用Yes, I like it a little/a lot/very much.或No, I don’t like it at all.来回答。 (3)小组内每个学生轮流问答一次后，游戏停止。 T: Boys and girls, let’s play a game: Ask and Gue.2.(教师出示人称代词卡片，让学生以“接龙”形式用教师呈现的人称代词造句。) T: Nice work! Now please look at these cards.Please use these words to make sentences one by one.Example: T: me S: He often helps me.1 T: they S: They are teachers.2 T: she S: She is my friend.3… (换成学生持卡片，教师造句子，导入新句型。) S: you 4 T: What do you do? (教师讲解。) Ss: We are students.(帮助学生回答。) T: (指着一个男/女生) What does he/she do?
Ss: He/She is a student.
(板书学习新句型，并要求学生掌握。) What does he/she do? He/She is a student.T: Do you want to know more jobs? Let’s come to the new leon.(导入新课) Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:13分钟) 通过展示图片、师生问答和分角色表演等形式，初步呈现新单词及新句型。 1.(出示3a图片，教授关于职业的新单词。) T: Look at Picture 1.What does he do? Ss:He’s a driver.(教师帮助学生回答。) 14
(板书并要求掌握。)
driver
T: Look at Picture 2.What does he do? Ss:He’s a farmer.(教师帮助学生回答。) (板书并要求掌握。) farmer (以同样的方式，出示图片，学习新单词cook, nurse, office, worker, doctor。并要求学生掌握。提醒学生注意an office worker。) 2.(让学生听3a录音，跟读，并注意语音语调。) T: Please listen to the tape and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.3.(学生两人一组，运用3a的图片，练习What does he/she do? He/She is a/an …句型，完成3a。) T: Please practice in pairs using the pictures in 3a.Then I’ll ask several pairs to act out in the front.4.(师生问答，自然过渡到1a的教学。) T: Nice work! Boys and girls, we learnt so many jobs just now.Do you want to know Kangkang’s families and their jobs? Ss:Yes.T: Please follow Maria, Jane, Michael to Kangkang’s home.(呈现1a的教学挂图，向学生们介绍。) T: Look at this picture.This is Kangkang’s mother.The four kids are Maria, Jane, Michael and Kangkang.
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
mother, kid
T: What does Kangkang’s mother say to the kids? Ss: Glad to meet you. T: Good! Then how do the kids reply? Ss: Glad to meet you, too.
(板书，教学新单词及新句型，并要求学生掌握。)
glad —Glad to meet you.—Glad to meet you, too.T: These kids are standing at Kangkang’s home.Do you know how to say“就座”in English? Ss:Have a seat.(教师帮助学生回答。) (板书并要求学生掌握。) seat, have a seat 5.(教师放1a录音，让学生跟读并注意语音语调。) T: OK.Please listen to the tape and read after it.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.6.(教师设置一个场景At Kangkang’s home.) T: Suppose you are at Kangkang’s home.Let’s role-play.(教师和四个学生合作，示范表演1a对话，之后学生五人一组操练，教师巡回指导，挑两组比较出色的上台表演。完成1b。) 7.(根据1a的教学挂图，过渡到2a。)
T: Look at the picture.Kangkang’s mother welcomes the kids at Kangkang’s home.What do Kangkang’s parents do? Do you want to know? (板书并讲授parent(s)的含义，引出father，要求学生掌握。)
mom—mother dad—father mother or father—parent mother and father—parents 15
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步
巩固(时间:7分钟) 通过听录音回答问题、填空以及分角色朗读、填写表格等形式，使学生在运用中进一步掌握新单词和新句型。 1.(教师播放2a录音，要求学生根据录音回答问题。) T: Please listen to the tape and answer the question: What do Kangkang’s parents do? (核对答案。) 2.(再放2a录音，要求学生根据录音填空，教师将听力问题用幻灯片呈现出来。)
T: Listen to the tape again and fill in the blanks on the slide.
—Kangkang, what does your do? —She is a .—And your father? —He is a .Michael, what do your do? —They are office workers.(核对答案后分角色朗读2a，然后四人一组操练。完成2a。) T: Read 2a in roles.Then practice in groups of four.3.(让学生独立完成2b。) T: Read 2a again and fill out the table in 2b.(核对答案。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8分钟) 通过“职业竞猜”游戏、师生和生生问答等形式，使学生熟练掌握新单词和新句型。 1.(做“职业竞猜”游戏，使学生在表演中熟悉职业名称。)
T: Let’s play a gueing game.(1)(活动过程：) ①(教师事先制作写有职业名称的卡片。如：teacher, worker, doctor, cook, driver等。) ②(活动前教师作一次示范：教师随意抽取一张卡片(如teacher)，并根据卡片上写的职业，做一个能代表该职业的动作(表演哑剧，假装在黑板上写字，或拿着书来回踱步等。)然后示意学生举手猜出该职业。学生若不能猜对，可以提问，但教师只能用Yes或No作答。)例如： S: Are you a doctor?T: No.1S: Are you a teacher?T: Yes.2③(学生猜对教师示范的职业后，教师退出活动，同时让猜对的那个学生上台抽卡、表演和回答问题，下一个猜对者接着上台抽卡，以此类推。) (2)(有关说明：) ①(每次提问次数和猜测次数应有所限制，在规定次数内仍未猜对，则可进行下一轮竞猜。) ②(本活动也可采用两组对抗形式，即一组派代表抽卡片表演，另一组猜职业。双方轮换角色，最后猜对次数多，准确率高的一组获胜。) 2.(教师出示各种职业人士的图片和学生进行对话练习，操练What do/does … do?) T: What do you do? Ss: We’re students.(教师按照图片依次问学生。) T: What does the man do? S: He is a driver.3 T: What does she do? S: She is a doctor.4 T: What does the man do? S: He is an office worker.5(教师应提醒学生注意此句中an的用法并板书。) 16
He is an office worker. 3.(教师把图片分给各小组，小组内每人轮流模仿老师提问其他学生，让每一位学生都有机会说英语。然后各组交换图片，进行对话练习。)
T: Please ask and answer in groups using these pictures.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:7分钟) 通过作调查、填表格和写短文等形式，培养学生综合运用本课目标语言的能力。 1.(出示小黑板，学生两人一组，运用3b中的例子，对同伴的家庭成员情况作调查，并填表格。完成3b。) T: Make a survey about your partner’s family after the example in 3b.Then fill out the table.×××’s Family Family member(家庭成员) Job(职业) Mother Father „ 2.(根据表格信息，写一篇小 短文对调查结果进行汇报。) T: Please report your partner’s family. 3.Homework: (1)学生采访自己的爸爸或妈妈，然后写一篇短文介绍他们工作的具体情况。鼓励学生在作业纸上画一张父亲(母亲)的画或贴一张父亲(母亲)的照片。下节课向全班宣读。 (2)准备一个硬纸板，剪成圆形的，直径10cm，制成一个转盘，下节课用。 板书设计：
What does your mother do? Section A an office worker —What do you do? Glad to meet you.—I’m a(an)… Please have a seat.—What does… do?
They are both office workers.—He/She is a (an)… Section B The main activity is 1a.本课重点活动是1a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn some new words and a phrase:work, hospital, on, farm, on a farm, drive 2.Talk about jobs and workplaces: (1)—What does the man do?—He’s a doctor.(2)—Where does he work?—He works in a hospital.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/教学挂图/小黑板/录音机/幻灯片/自制的转盘 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:6分钟) 通过检查家庭作业，问答接龙等形式，复习重点知识，导入新课。 1.(师生应用Glad to meet you.相互问候，全体起立。)
T: Good morning/afternoon, cla.Glad to meet you again.Ss: Glad to meet you, too.Mi/Mr.… T: Please have a seat.Ss: Thank you.2.(将学生分为五人一组。学生先在小组内宣读上节课布置的家庭作业，然后各小组推选一名学生向全班宣读。) T: Please work in groups of five and introduce your father or mother to your clamates in groups.Then vote a student to report to us.17
3.(运用图片，做“问答接龙”活动，复习What do/does …
do?)
T: What does … do? (教师手持有某职业人员的图片。) S: He/She is a … 1 (转向另一个学生)What does/do … do? S: He/She is a …/They are … 2 (转向下一个学生)What do/does … do? S: … 3… Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:12分钟) 运用图片及教学挂图，通过师生、生生问答的形式，引出并学习生词及新句型。 1.(教师出示一位医生在医院的图片。) T: Very good.Boys and girls, do you know what Kangkang’s father does? Ss: He’s a doctor.T: Yes, he’s a doctor.He works in a hospital. (板书并要求学生掌握。) work hospital in a hospital T: Where does Kangkang’s father work? Ss: He works in a hospital.(教师帮助学生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握句型。)
Where does Kangkang’s father work? He works in a hospital.(教师解释in a hospital表示地点，用where提问。) T: (出示一个农民在农场的图片。) Boys and girls, look at this picture.Where’s the farmer? Ss: He’s on a farm.(教师帮助学生回答，并强调“在农场”是“on a farm”。注意介词“on”的使用。)
(板书并要求掌握。)
on, farm, on a farm 2.(利用构词法教授新词drive，板书并要求学生掌握。) (出示小黑板) work（工作）——worker（工人） farm（务农）——farmer（农民） drive（开车）——driver（司机） teach（教学）——teacher（教师） T: Look at the small blackboard and gue the meaning of“drive”.(先让学生仔细观察每组词的变化，再观察汉语意思，然后总结规律。在小组内讨论、探究，达成一致意见后，各小组长向全班汇报。)
(教师总结：一些动词，如果在其后加er(或or)之后，就变成了名词，名词表示执行这个动词动作的人。教师可以利用学过的动词进行补充，让学生猜测其意。例如：think(思考)——thinker(思想家)；speak(说，讲)
——speaker(演讲者)；visit(参观) ——visitor(来访者)等等。) (学生大声朗读教师板书的词。) (导入1a。) 3.(教师出示1a教学挂图并谈论。)
T: Look at this picture.The man is a doctor.This is a hospital.He works in a hospital.(教师要求学生看图复述，可以增加更多的内容。) 4.(教师放1a录音，学生跟读，然后师生互动，先模仿，后操练。)
T: Listen to the tape and repeat.Then practice 1a in pairs. Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟) 18
通过对话、猜谜等形式，让学生进一步掌握重点句型及生词，完成1b和2。 1.(用幻灯片呈现1b中女教师上课的图片。) T: Look at this picture.What does she do, S? 1S: She is a teacher.1 T: Where does she work, S? 2S: She works in a school.2 T: Well done! (教师接着用幻灯片呈现农民干活的图片。) T: Look at this picture.What do the men do? S: They are farmers.3 T: Where do they work? S: They work on a farm.4(教师用幻灯片呈现机关人员工作的图片。) T: Look at the picture.What do they do, S? 5S: They are office workers.5 T: Where do they work? S: They work in an office.52.(学生看1b，两人一组依照范例操练对话，完成1b。然后找几组学生到前面表演。) T: Practice in pairs according to the pictures in 1b after the example.Then I’ll ask several pairs to act out in the front.3.(两人一组做“问答猜谜”活动，教师示范，完成2。)
T: Let’s ask and answer to gue riddles.Example: T: My sister works in a hospital.But she isn’t a doctor.What does she do, S? 6S: I think she is a nurse.64.(教师将Section A，3a中的图片呈现出来，依次和学生进行问答练习。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:12分钟) 通过听录音回答问题并填空，做调查等形式，继续巩固本课的重点语言项目，完成3和4。 1.(教师播放3录音，先让学生口头回答下列问题，然后再听录音填表格，完成3。)
T: Listen to the tape, and answer the following questions orally.Then listen again and fill out the table in 3.(小黑板出示下列问题。) (1)What do David and Paul do? (2)Is Lisa a driver? Where does she work? (3)Where does Danny work? (依次让五名学生回答问题并核对答案，核对3中表格的答案。) 2.(做调查，完成4。每个学生至少要问三个学生，然后完成表格。先在小组内汇报，然后每个小组挑选一个代表向全班汇报。)
T: Make a survey.Ask your clamates about their parents’ jobs and workplaces.Then fill out the table in 4.First report in groups, then vote a student to report to the cla.3.(教师利用幻灯片呈现下列内容，要求学生填写所缺的句子，补全对话。)
T: Please look at the slide and complete the dialog. —Excuse me, could you please tell me your name? —Sure, my name is Da Long.And you? —My name is Li Gang.Glad to meet you, Da Long.—Glad to meet you, too.—What do you do? —I’m a student.—What does your father do? —My father is a worker.—Where does he work? 19
—He works in a factory.(画线句子为学生要填写的。) 4.(出示小黑板或幻灯片。让学生把职业和职业特征连接，复习职业类词汇及相关句型。) farmer works in the hospital driver teaches at school cook works on the farm nurse drives a bus doctor works in an office office worker studies English student works in the kitchen(厨房) teacher looks after patients(病人) T: Please match the jobs with the workplaces.Example: doctor—works in the hospital (核对答案。) 5.(以幻灯片形式呈现chant的内容，教师领着学生有节奏地读。) T: Let’s chant.Please read after me rhythmically. Work, work, work, work People work every day Fathers work Mothers work Teachers work Nurses work Cooks work Farmers work Work at home Work at school Work everywhere Work, work, work, work Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:5分钟) 通过做游戏、写短文等形式，培养学生综合运用语言的能力。 1.(教师可以用自制的写有worker, farmer, student等职业名词的转盘向学生演示，转动转盘，当停住时，问一位同学，让他/她回答。然后让学生拿出上次课外作业布置的自制转盘，一个学生问，另一个学生回答。完成5。)
T: Let’s play a game: Job Spinning.Now ask and answer in pairs after the example.Example: S: What do you do? 1S: I’m a(an) … 2S: Where do you work? 1S: I work … 2 2.Homework: (1)将所学过的表示职业类的名词制成卡片，然后两人一组操练What do/does … do?和 Where do/does … work? (2)写一篇介绍家庭成员职业的文章，词数在四十个左右。 (3)让有全家福照片的同学下节课带上，以备下节课使用。 板书设计： What does your mother do? Section B 20
in a hospital —What do/does … do? on a farm —He/She is a(an) … /They are …/I am…
in a school —Where does he/she work? in an office —He/She works …
Section C The main activity is 1a.
本课重点活动是1a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.(1)Learn some words about family members and relatives: aunt, uncle, brother, grandparent, cousin, daughter, son (2)Learn other new words and a phrase: family, sofa, tree, family tree 2.Identify family members: (1)This is a photo of my family.(2)Who’s the young woman in yellow? (3)Who are they on the sofa?(4)I have a big family.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/照片/教学挂图/录音机/小黑板/幻灯片 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步
复习(时间:10分钟) 运用图片和全家福照片，通过师生问答的形式，复习有关职业及工作场所的句型，并引入部分新单词，导入新课。 1.(教师出示各种职业人物的图片，复习有关职业及工作场所的句型。) (教师出示一个医生的图片。) T: What does he do? S: He is a doctor.1 T: Where does he work? S: He works in a hospital.1(教师出示一个女教师的图片。)
(教师出示一个办公室男职员的图片，让学生互相问答。) 2.(出示一张四口之家的全家福，通过陈述人物关系引入新词汇。) T: Look at this photo.It’s a photo of Michael’s family. (板书并要求学生掌握。)
family
T: (指着图片上的男孩) The boy is Michael.(指着图片上的女孩) The little girl is his sister, Jane.Michael is Jane’s
brother. (板书，让学生猜其意。然后要求学生掌握。)
brother T: The man in black is Mr.Brown.He is Michael and Jane’s father.The woman in red is their mother.So Jane is the woman’s daughter and Michael is her son. (板书并要求学生掌握。) daughter, son 3.(猜人物关系，学生听教师的描述，在教师的帮助下学习更多新词汇。) T:Your father’s brother is your …? 21
Ss: Uncle.(帮助学生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
uncle
T: Your mother’s brother is your …? Ss: Uncle.T: S, do you have an uncle? 5S: Yes, I do./No, I don’t.5
T: Your father’s sister is your …? Ss: Aunt.(帮助学生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握。) aunt T: Your mother’s sister is your …? Ss: Aunt.T: Your aunt’s son is your …? Ss: Cousin.(帮助学生回答。) (板书并要求学生掌握。) cousin T: Your aunt’s daughter is your cousin, too.Here, cousin means“表姐妹”in Chinese.T: Your parents’ parents are your …? Ss: Grandparents.(帮助学生回答。) (板书并要求学生掌握。)
grandparents (导入新课。)
Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:6分钟) 利用师生问答、听录音跟读、分角色朗读等形式，呈现师展示1a
1a内容，学习部分生词。 1.(教
1a教学挂图，通过问答形式，学习新单词，理清中的人物关系。) T: This is a photo of Kangkang’s family. (板书) a photo of … (师生问答，允许有不符合原文的回答，为后面的听力打基础。)
T: (手指沙发) Who are they on the sofa? (板书并要求学生掌握。) sofa S: They are Kangkang’s grandparents.5 T: Who is the little girl? S: She is Kangkang’s cousin.62.(听1a录音，核对答案。) 3.(再听1a录音并跟读，模仿语音语调。)
T: Listen and repeat.Imitate the pronunciation and intonation.4.(学生分角色朗读，完成1a。) T: Read 1a in roles. Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10
分钟) 通过找关键词、表演对话、展示全家福等形式，使学生在运用中掌握新知识。 1.(学生自读
1a，并找出关键词。教师板书关键词，让学生根据关键词表演1a对话。) T: Read 1a by yourselves and find out the key words.Then act out the dialog according to the key words on the blackboard.(板书) a photo of —— woman in yellow —— woman in red —— man in a green T-shirt —— 22
on the sofa —— big family 2.(学生再读1a。根据1a内容，完成1b。并互相核对答案。) T: Please read 1a again.Then fill in the blanks in 1b according to 1a.Then check the answers together.3.(挑选几个学生，展示自己的全家福，并作简单介绍。)
T: Please show us photos of your family.Then introduce them to your clamates.S, please.1 S: This is my … He/She is a(an) … He/She works … 1 S: There are three people in my family.They are my mother, father and I.My mother is a 2 teacher.… … (对于介绍流利，发音准确的学生，给予表扬。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:12分钟)
1.(教师出示画在小黑板上康康的家谱。)
Kangkang’s Family Tree T: This is Kangkang’s family tree. (板书并要求学生掌握。) tree, family tree 2.(让学生参照1a内容，完成康康的家谱，核对答案，完成1c。) T: Please complete Kangkang’s family tree according to 1a.Then check the answers together.3.(让学生参照康康的家谱，编对话。两人一组练习，然后找几组到讲台前表演。)
T: Please make conversations after the example according to Kangkang’s family tree.Then practice in pairs.I’ll ask several pairs to act them out in the front.Example: T: Who’s the man in black? S: He’s Kangkang’s father.14.(教师用幻灯片展示一篇短文，学生读后完成家谱，并核对答案。)
My name is Jack.I am a boy.I’m 12 years old.I’m a student.My father is a doctor.My mother is a teacher.My aunt and uncle are both office workers.They have a daughter.I have a little sister.My little sister is four years old.She is at home with my grandparents.
T: Nice work.Please read the paage on the slide, then complete the following family tree.(板书) _ _ _’s Family Tree (核对答案。) 5.(让学生画自己家的家谱，并对家庭成员作简短的批注，如：职业、年龄和工作地点等。) T : Draw your own family tree and write some information about your family members, such as jobs, age and 23
workplaces.
6.(根据自己家的家谱和2中的提示性问题写一篇小短文，完成2。) T: Write a short paage according to your own family tree and the questions in 2.I’ll ask several students to read your paages.Example: This is my family.My father is … years old.He is a/an … .He works in/on/at … .My mother is … years old.She is a/an … .She works in/on/at … .My aunt is … .My uncle is … .I am … years old.I am a … .
(教师挑选几个学生，让他们大声朗读自己的短文，并给予点评和鼓励。) Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:7分钟) 通过chant、采访和填表格等探究活动，培养学生综合运用目标语言的能力。 1.(播放录音，学生跟着chant。在吟唱中复习所学词汇，完成3。)
T: Listen to the tape and have a chant.2.(采访活动，让学生充当小记者采访同学，然后完成下表。出示小黑板。)
T: Suppose you are a journalist and interview your clamates about their family members.Then fill out the table on the small blackboard. Name Relation Age Job Workplace _ _ _’s Family _ _ _’s Family 3.Homework: 收集家人及亲戚的照片，用英语写一篇短文，简单描述他们的职业、工作单位、与你的关系等情况，并带到学校来，与同学们共享。 板书设计：
What does your mother do? Section C This is a photo of … on the sofa family tree key words: a photo of——woman in yellow——woman in red——man in a green T-shirt——on the sofa——big family
Section D The main activities are 1, 2a and 5.本课重点活动是1, 2a和5。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.(1) Learn the following phonetic symbols:/m/, /n/, /l/
(2) Learn some new words and a phrase:happy, teach, only, after, look after 2.Review Wh-Questions with what/where: (1)What do your parents do?(2)Where do you/they work?
3.Learn the useful sentences: (1)I have a happy family.(2)My grandparents live with us and look after Rose at home.(3)Jack’s mother is in red.24
Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 单词卡片/图片/录音机/幻灯片/录像设备/小黑板/奖品/投影 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:15分钟) 放录音，出示全家福，师生对话，复习有关职业的词汇及句型，引出新词汇，导入新课。 1.(方案一)(播放含有职业性对话的录音片断，师生互动。) T: Now, let’s listen to the tape, and answer my questions.(1)(播放医生询问病人病情的录音片断，可以是中文的。) T: What does the man/woman do? S: He/She is a doctor.1(2)(播放教师上英语课的录音片断。) T: What does the man/woman do? S: He/She is a teacher.2
T: He/She teaches English.
(板书，教学新单词，并要求掌握。) teacher —— teach (3)(播放学生上课的录音片断。) T: What do they do? S: They are students.3(以同样的方式进行其他“听录音辨职业”训练。) (方案二)(看录像/幻灯片/投影/图片，找出具有职业特征的人物。) (教师让学生快速观看录像/幻灯片/投影/图片，然后提出问题。) T: Who can you see? S: I can see a teacher.4S: I can see a doctor.5S: I can see a driver.6… (直到没有学生补充为止，然后再现材料，让学生仔细观察，师生合作，共同找出所有职业性人物。) 2.(看谁演得好:让学生上前表演各种职业的特征，可利用道具。)
T: Nice work! Now I’ll ask some students to act out different jobs and say what you do and where you work.S, 7 please.S: I am a … I work in a …(学生一边说一边做该职业的标志性动作。) 7S: I am a … I work in a …(像S一样) 87(所有volunteers表演完毕后，师生一起评出“最佳演员”，并颁发奖品。如：英语本。) 3.(教师出示一张自己家三代同堂的全家福，师生问答，引出新词汇。) T: Boys and girls, please look at this photo of my family.This girl is my little daughter.Can you gue how old she is? Ss: She is four years old.(学生猜测女儿的年龄。) T: Yes.She is only four years old, and she is very cute.
(板书，教学新单词，并要求学生掌握only；了解cute。)
only, cute
Ss: Yes.
T: Do you know who’s looking after my daughter now? Ss: Her grandparents.(板书，并要求掌握。) after, look after T: You are right.I think I have a happy family. 25
(板书，学习新单词，并要求掌握。) happy (导入1。)
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:10分钟) 运用卡片学习音标；听录音，做阅读理解，掌握目标语言。 1.(出示
1中的单词卡，让学生认读单词。) T: Boys and girls, we all know this word, right? (手持family单词卡。) Now I’ll show you more word cards.Please read these words in turn.(手持nurse单词卡) S: Nurse.1 (手持apple单词卡) S: Apple.2 (手持map单词卡) S: Map.3 … T: (出示mouse, monkey的单词卡。) Well done! Now please look at the two words.Can you read them? The old words can help you.Ss: Mouse, monkey.(教师可帮助学生学会怎样用学过的单词拼读新单词。) 2.(让学生把单词卡片归类。教学音标/m/, /n/, /ŋ/, /l/.) T: Good.You are very clever.Now please divide these words according to the pronunciation.
(板书)
/m/
/n/ /ŋ/ /l/ 3.(播放1录音，并让学生跟读，直到读准确为止，完成1。) T: Very good! Now please listen to the tape and repeat.4.(由自己家的全家福照片，导入2a。)
T: You know about my family.Today we have a new friend, Peter.Here is a photo of Peter’s family.After listening to the tape, you’ll know about his family.Do you want to know him? (1)(让学生听2a，然后回答小黑板上所列的问题，师生核对答案。)
T: Please listen to the tape.Then answer the following questions. 1.How old is Peter? 2.Where is he from? 3.How old is his little sister? (2)(再播放2a录音，完成在小黑板上绘制的如下表格，训练学生的听力。) T: Listen to the tape again.And fill out the table on the small blackboard. Family member Job Workplace Peter Father Mother Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:6分钟) 通过复述短文和人物访谈，使学生进一步巩固目标语言。 1.(学生精读
2a，完成2b，核对答案；并要求同桌之间进行对话。)
T: Read 2a again.Then answer the questions in 2b.Then check the answers with your deskmate.26
2.(板书关键词，让学生复述2a。) T: Please retell the paage according to the key words on the blackboard.
Peter—come from—twelve—student—Beijing—father—doctor—hospital—mother—teacher—school—Rose—four—grandparents—look after (学生如有困难，教师要及时给予帮助，对复述流畅、准确的学生给予鼓励。) 3.(仿写短文，让学生把自己的家庭情况，用关键词概括，然后口述。) T: Imitate the paage in 2a and retell the information about your family orally.4.(人物访谈：让两位学生表演，S扮记者，S扮外国明星。) 12
T: Let’s have an interview.Suppose S is a reporter, S is a famous foreign star.S interviews S.OK, please! 1212S: Welcome to China, Mr./Mi … 1S: Thank you.2S: May I know your family? 1S: Sure.2S: What does your father/mother do? 1S: My father/mother is a (an) … 2S: Do you like China? 1S: Yes.I like China very much.2S: Thank you very much.1S: You’re welcome.2(让学生两人一组练习人物访谈对话。)
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8分钟) 通过做游戏和做练习，使学生在运用中掌握目标语言，并训练学生的听力。 1.(播放两遍3的录音，第一遍让学生了解大意，第二遍后判断正误，核对答案。) T: Listen to the tape for the first time in order to learn about main ideas.Then listen again and mark True or False in 3.I’ll check the answers.2.(重放3录音，学生获取更多信息，并根据对话内容，复述
Jack
的家庭情况，完成3。)
T: Listen to the tape again, and try to get more information.Then retell Jack’s family according to the dialog.3.(做游戏：找朋友。课前把4a，4b中的问句和答句写在卡片上，打乱顺序，让十六个学生抽取卡片，然后迅速找到与自己相对应的问句或答语，两人一组表演出来。)
T: Let’s play a game: Finding friends.Here are sixteen cards.I’ll ask sixteen students to draw the cards.Then find out their own questions or responses quickly and act out in the front.Example: Group 1 S:What do your parents do? 1 S:They are both office workers.2 Group 2 S:What do you do? 3 S:I’m a student.4
… 4.(播放4a、4b录音，学生跟读，并注意语音语调。完成4a和4b。)
T: Listen to the tape and repeat.Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.5.(教师出示小黑板，学习并操练本单元的特殊疑问句。) T: Let’s do some exercises.Please look at the small blackboard.Fill in the blanks, then check the answers together.
对画线部分提问：
(1) My parents are workers.
do your parents ? (2) I am a student.27
do you ? (3) The man works on a farm.the man work? (4) They work in a school.they work? (核对答案。) Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:6分钟) 通过画家谱，采访，填表格，写短文等形式，培养学生综合运用本话题语言知识的能力。 1.(听叙述，画家谱。 老师让一个或几个学生介绍自己的家庭情况，其他学生根据叙述，画出家谱，看谁画得最正确。完成5（1）。)
T: Listen to the description of your partner’s family photo.Then draw his/her family tree.And we will decide who draws best.2.(人人都做小记者。学生两人一组相互采访，完成5(2)。)
T: Suppose you are a reporter, interview your partner about his/her family members.Then fill out the table in 5.让学生根据5(2)采集到的信息，写一篇介绍搭档家庭的小短文，完成5(3)。教师挑选几篇写得好的短文，粘贴在教室后面的《英语学习园地》栏。 板书设计：
What does your mother do? Section D live with us look after 1./m/, /n/,/ŋ/, /l/ in red 2.My grandparents live with 3.Homework: us and look after Rose at home.
on the sofa 3.What do your parents do?
a photo of my family 4.What does the man do?
Topic 3 What would you like to drink? Section A The main activities are 1a and 3.本课重点活动是1a和3。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.(1)Learn some words about food and drink: fish, chicken, rice, drink, juice, milk, water, vegetable, bread, hamburger (2)Learn some other new words and phrases: yourself/yourselves, help oneself (to), would, about, What about …? all right, for, idea, good idea
2.Talk about having meals and making suggestions: (1)—Help yourselves!—Thank you.(2)—Would you like some …?—No, thanks.(3)—What would you like to eat/drink?—Apple juice, please.—I’d like … (4)—Milk for me, please.—Me, too.(5)—What about some …?—Good
idea.
3.Learn countable nouns and uncountable nouns.28
Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/实物/录音机/小黑板 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:12分钟) 利用图片和实物，通过师生问答的形式，激活学生的英语思维，调动学生的积极性，并导入新课。 1.(教师出示图片，复习表示食物的单词。)
T: Hello, boys and girls.I know you learnt many words about food, now look at the pictures.What’s this in English?(图片上为一红色苹果。) S: It’s an apple.1
T: Good.What color is it? S: It’s red.1 T: Do you like it? S: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.1(教师以同样的方法，复习orange(s), banana(s), egg(s), cake(s)。) 2.(教师摆放几个水果，如：oranges, bananas, apples, 引起学生的兴趣。) T: (教师拿一个苹果) I have an apple.T: (教师手捧几个苹果) I have some apples.T: (换成几个橘子) I have some oranges.T: (换成几个香蕉) I have some bananas.(教师引导学生说：I have some …) S: I have some books.2S: I have some friends.3S: I have some pens.4… 3.(教师手拿橘子，请一个学生进行如下对话。) T: S, do you like oranges? S: Yes, I do.55 T: Do you want some oranges? S: Yes, I do.5T: (把橘子给S) Here you are.S: Thanks.554.(学生积极性已被调动，教师趁热打铁。) T: Do you want some oranges? Ss: Yes, I do.T: OK.Now, please look at the blackboard.(板书)
Do you want some oranges?=
T: We can say it like this: (在等号后面板书并领读。) Would you like some oranges? (师生交换角色，引出Would you like some …?的答语。)
T: S, S: Would you like some cakes? 6
T: No, thanks.(教师表扬S并给他/她一个橘子。) 6
T: Now, boys and girls.Do you understand? Ss: Yes.T: OK.Let’s try.S, would you like some oranges?
S: Yes, please./No, thanks.77
T: S, would you like some apples? S: Yes, please./No, thanks.88(教师在Would you like some oranges?后面板书。) 肯定回答：Yes, please.否定回答：No, thanks.(导入1a。) Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:13分钟) 利用图片、创设情境以及肢体语言等方式学习生词和新句型。引导学生运用观察、归纳和实践等方法学习语言知识，感悟语言功能。 1.(教师出示食物图片，并在食物下方写上英语。) 29 please say “would you like some …?” S: OK.Would you like some oranges? 66 T: Yes, please.
T: S, would you like some chicken? (教师手持chicken图片。) 1 S: Yes, please./ No, thanks.1(教师把图片贴在黑板上，教学该单词，并要求学生掌握。) T: S, would you like some rice? (教师手持rice图片。) 2 S: Yes, please./ No, thanks.2(把图片贴在黑板上，教学该单词，并要求学生掌握。) (用同样的方法，教授fish, juice, milk, water, vegetable, bread, hamburger。) (板书) fish, chicken, rice, juice, milk, water, vegetable, bread, hamburger 2.(为学生创设情境，引出句型。) T: S, look! There are many kinds of foods here, are you hungry? (手拍腹部。) 3 S:Yes.3 T: What do you want to have?(作吃东西状，提示该学生。) S: I want some … 3 (板书) What do you want to have?= I want some …= (教师继续提问。) T: S, there are many kinds of drinks here.Are you thirsty?(作喝水动作，提示该学生。) 4 S: Yes.4 T: What do you want to drink? S: I want some … 4 (板书) drink What do you want to drink?= I want some …= 3.(让学生观察前面的Do you want some …?部分，引导学生说出以上句子的同义句，并板书。) What do you want to have?=What would you like to have? I want some … =I would like some … What do you want to drink?=What would you like to drink? I want some … =I would like some … (师生互动操练板书的句型。) T: S,what would you like to have? 5 S: I would like some … 5(操练完毕，教师说明I would like通常写成I’d like，板书，领读，并要求学生掌握。)
I would like=I’d like T: Can you say some sentence patterns like this: I’d like some apples.(学生模仿) S: I’d like some … 64.(待四个学生操练完毕，教师总结，提问，引出另一句型What about …?) T: Different people like different foods and drinks, S would like …, S would like …, S would like …, S would 6789 like …(教师叫S) What about you, S? 1010 S:I’d like some …(教师帮助回答。) 10 T: Would you like some …? S:No, thanks.10 T: What about some …?
S:Good idea.(帮助学生回答。) 10
(教师板书，解释What about的用法。) 30
What about …? Good idea.5.(看图猜句子，教师展示一幅用餐图片，图中主人正请客人用餐，在主人头上画一云状话语框，用纸片盖住Help yourselves。)
T: Gue, what will he say? S: Do you want some rice? 11S: Would you like some …? 12S: What do you want to have? 13S: What would you like to have? 14S: What would you like to drink? 15… (学生积极发言，教师最后掀开纸片露出Help yourselves。板书并要求学生掌握。)
Help yourself/yourselves.(先让学生猜意思，然后教师解释含义及用法。) (教师拿几个橘子，走到一个学生旁边。) T: Help yourself to some oranges.(教师示意那个学生拿一个橘子。) S: Thank you.16(做同样的活动，直到教师手里橘子被拿完。) 6.(播放1a录音，让学生找出所听到的表示食物或饮料的名词，并核对。) T: OK.Listen to the tape and find out the words about food and drink you hear.Try, please.7.(要求学生再听1a录音并跟读，注意语音语调。)
T: Good.Listen and repeat.Please pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.(用英语解释部分生词并板书，要求学生掌握。) all right=OK Milk for me.=I’d like some milk.Me, too.=I’d like some milk, too. Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:7分钟) 通过填表格、观察讨论等活动，培养学生观察力，巩固所学语言知识。 1.(读1a，填1b表格，核对答案，完成1b。) T: Please read 1a again.Find out what Michael, Maria and Jane want to have.Then fill out the table.2.(教师出示小黑板，黑板上写有食物和饮料的名称，并按可数名词和不可数名词归类。让学生观察小黑板并讨论，然后说出观察结果，引出可数名词与不可数名词。) Group A: Countable nouns Group B: Uncountable nouns some eggs some fish some cakes some rice some apples some bread some hamburgers some chicken some vegetables some apple juice some oranges some water some bananas some milk T: Now, let’s look at the blackboard together! Who can tell me the differences between Group A and Group B? Ss:There is an “s” in the words in Group A, but in Group B there isn’t the letter.T: Well done.But do you know why? Ss:Sorry.We don’t know.(教师稍作解释。) 3.(看图找物。教师展示一幅用餐图片，让学生找出所学的食物类名词。) T: Look at the picture.What kind of food can you see? 31
S: I can see some cakes.1S: I can see some vegetables.2S: … 3… (教师提醒学生，注意使用正确形式。) 4.(播放3录音，让学生先配对，再按可数名词与不可数名词归类。完成3。)
T: Well done! Now, please listen to 3.Then match the food and drink with the words, next divide them into countable nouns and uncountable nouns.(核对答案。) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8
分钟) 通过角色表演，听力练习及情景表演，强化训练本节课的功能用语和新单词。 1.(角色表演，学生四人一组操练
1a对话，然后教师挑选一组表演该对话。) T: Let’s role-play.Please practice the dialog in 1a in groups of four.Then I’ll choose one group to come to the front and act it out.2.(播放2录音，完成2。) T: Very good.Here’s another conversation about having meals.(教师可以用汉语解释having meals。) Please listen to the tape and write down the words about food and drinks.Are you ready? Please go.(核对答案。) 3.(情景表演：晚上你的朋友到你家用餐，请你和朋友一起表演就餐对话。)
T: Nice work.Imagine one of your friends comes to your home to have supper this evening.Can you make a conversation with your friend? You can use these useful expreions: Help yourself! Would you like … ? What would you like …? I don’t like … What about …? Good idea.… Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:5分钟) 通过采访和讨论等活动，把学习英语与学生生活有机结合起来，培养他们的健康意识。 1.(采访活动) (1)(教师先示范，然后学生四人一组，进行采访，并填写4表格。)
(2)(汇报结果：教师先展示一个学生的采访结果。然后挑选几个学生朗读他们的调查报告。)
T: In the leon, we learned some names about food and drink.Now let’s work in groups of four.Ask your three clamates what they would like to eat and drink.Then write them down to fill out the table in 4.You can begin like this: S, what do you like to eat? 1 S: I like some vegetables and fish.1 T: What do you like to drink? S: I like some milk.1 T: Good! I’ll choose some of you to report it like this: X X likes to eat vegetables.X X likes to drink some milk.Do you understand? Please go! 2.(讨论：我们应该吃什么食物才是最健康的？) (教师可以设计如下内容，学生讨论后连线。) (教师出示小黑板。) fish make us clever (使人聪明) chicken make us healthy (使人健康) milk make us fat (使人变胖) eggs make us sleep well (帮助入睡) vegetables juice hamburgers T: Let’s look at the small blackboard.Please discu and match.(核对答案。) 3.Homework: 32
(1)熟读1a对话。 (2)对自己的家人做一个调查，制作如4表格。 板书设计：
What would you like to drink?
Section A Help yourself/yourselves.What about …? I would like … =I’d like … Good idea.
Do you want some oranges?=Would you like some oranges? Yes, please./ No, thanks. What do you want to have?= What would you like to have? I want some …=I would like some … What do you want to drink?= What would you like to drink? I want some …=I would like some …
Section B
The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: usually, breakfast, lunch, supper, food, may, take, order, take one’s order, sir, something, gla, a gla of, wait, moment, wait a moment, let, well 2.Talk about having meals and ordering food:
(1)What do you usually have for breakfast, Michael? (2)May I take your order, sir?
3.Go on talking about offering, accepting and refusing.(1)It’s my favorite food.I like Chinese food very much.(2)—Would you like something to drink? —Yes.A gla of apple juice, please./No, thanks.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/录音机/图钉/小黑板/彩色粉笔/实物/菜单 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:6分钟) 通过游戏，复习Section A，激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养他们的观察能力。 (玩游戏，复习已学词汇，培养学生速记能力与观察能力。) (方案一)(少了什么？教师准备若干食物卡片，并将这些卡片一一展示，学生逐一读出卡片上的食物名称，然后将卡片抽去一张让学生快速辨认，看少了哪一张，教师可以问What’s miing?学生只需回答单词。) T: Are you ready? Go! (教师先拿出卡片让学生快速看一眼，然后合卡，抽卡，再呈现给学生。) What’s miing? S: Chicken.1(重复活动，复习词汇。) (方案二)(找区别：教师准备A，B两幅相似的用餐图片，让学生快速看一眼A图然后收起来，并出示B图，提问学生What’s the difference?学生可以用I can see some … (a/an …) in Picture A, but I can’t see them (it) in Picture B.教师示范。) T: You can begin like this: I can see an apple in Picture A, but I can’t see it in Picture B.I can see some fish in Picture A, but I can’t see it in Picture B.(对找出最多区别的同学给予表扬。) Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:12分钟) 33
设置情境，引出新句型。 1.(教师戴上服务生的帽子和领结，手里拿着一支笔和一张菜单，通过对话引出新词汇。) T: Boys and girls, can you gue what I do? Ss: You are a cook.T: No, I’m not a cook.I am a waiter/waitre.(教师解释waiter和waitre。) (然后教师展示一张饭店菜单。) T: What’s this in English? S: It’s an order.(教师帮助学生说出an order，板书并要求学生掌握。) 1 order 2.(情景表演：教师请三位同学扮演顾客，到讲台来。教师在课前将讲台桌装饰成餐桌，并在上面放一些食品，如鸡蛋、蛋糕、一杯牛奶、一杯苹果汁„„) T: S, S, S, please come to the front.234S: OK.2,3,4 T: S, would you like some eggs? 2S: Yes, please./No, thanks.2 T: S, what would you like to drink? 3S: A gla of apple juice, please.(学生可能会回答apple juice，帮助学生回答a gla of apple juice。解释gla，板3 书并要求学生掌握。)
gla
T: S, would you like something to drink?(板书并解释something, 要求学生掌握。) 4 something S: A gla of milk.Thanks.43.(教师另请两名男生，到讲台前。) T: S, S, please come to the front.56S:OK.5,6
T: May I take your order, sir?(教学may, take, sir板书并要求学生掌握。) may ,take, sir S: Some eggs, please.5S: Some cakes, please.6 T: Would you like something to drink? S: A gla of apple juice, please.5S: A gla of milk, please.6 T: OK.Wait a moment, please.(教师讲解wait a moment，板书并要求学生掌握。)
wait a moment 4.(播放2a录音，让学生判断说话者的身份，并指出录音中提到哪些食物和饮料。) T: Well, now listen to the dialog, and gue what the woman does.And what the food and drink are mentioned in the dialog.5.(再放2a录音，让学生跟读，注意语音语调。)
T: Good! Now listen again and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.6.(学生两人一组根据2a对话，画出不懂之处。) T: OK.Now practice the dialog with your partner.Then underline the sentences you don’t understand.7.(教师解答学生疑问，完成2a。) T: Do you know another way of saying“Would you like something to drink?” S: What would you like to drink? 7 S: What do you want to drink? 8 (教师板书) What would you like to drink? = What do you want to drink? 34
=Would you like something to drink? (以同样方式让学生说出Would you like something to have?的同义句。) T: Good.Can you tell me another way of saying“Would you like something to have?” Ss: What would you like to have?/What do you want to have? Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:8分钟) 通过表演，巩固2a，完成2b。培养学生听说读写的综合语言技能。 1.(角色表演：教师挑选几组表演2a对话。) 2.(情景剧表演：教师提供几个单词，学生自由发挥，但要运用所学句型。) (小黑板出示。) 场所：restaurant(餐馆) 人物：Michael, Jane, Kangkang, a waiter/waitre 必用词汇：may, would, chicken, milk, what about, something, wait T: Well done! Now look at the small blackboard.Suppose you are Michael, Jane, Kangkang and a waiter/waitre.You are at the restaurant.Please come to the front and act out.You can use the words on the blackboard and
expreions about offering, accepting and refusing you have learnt, volunteers? (鼓励学生积极参与。) 3.(让学生自己先试着填写2b中的空格，画出不懂之处，然后教师解决学生所提疑问。) 4.(待学生完成后，核对答案，让学生两人一组表演2b。完成2b。) T: Very good.Let’s check the answers now.Next, please go on acting with your partner.One acts the rabbit, and the other acts the monkey.(教师可以用英语解释Something to drink?=Would you like something to drink?用汉语解释What do you usually have for lunch?) Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:11分钟) 学习三餐饮食习惯的表达，进一步巩固所学句型和单词。 1.(教师出示三张钟表简图，分别是早上7∶00，中午12∶00，下午5∶00，内容都是一家人吃饭的情景。) T: (出示图片1)It is seven o’clock in the morning.(出示图片2)It is twelve o’clock at noon.(出示图片3)And it is five o’clock in the afternoon.Are you clear?Ss:Yes.T: (手持图片1) Do they wait for a bus?Ss:No. (教师解释wait for …，板书并要求学生掌握。) wait for… T: What do they do?Ss:… (学生会用汉语回答。)T:They have breakfast.
(板书，让学生猜测词义，然后领读，要求学生掌握。)
breakfast
T: (出示图片2) They have lunch.
(板书，让学生猜测词义，然后领读，要求学生掌握。) lunch T: (出示图片3) They have supper. (板书，让学生猜测词义，然后领读，要求学生掌握。) supper (联系实际，板书学生在校用餐的时间, 并提问。) in the morning / 8:00 at noon / 12:00 in the afternoon / 5:30 T: (手指8:00) What do you do at this time?Ss:We have breakfast.T: (手指12:30) What do you do at this time? Ss: We have lunch.T: (手指5:30) What do you do at this time? Ss: We have supper.35
(提问一名学生) T: I know, you often have breakfast at eight.What do you usually have for breakfast? (手拿些食物做吃饭动作，帮助
have
学生理解。) S: I often
usually。) … for breakfast.1(教师板书解释并领读，要求学生掌握usually, What do you usually have for breakfast?
T: S, what do you usually have for lunch? 2S: I usually have … for lunch.2
T: S, what do you usually have for supper? 3S: I usually have … for supper.3(教师总结。)
T: Different
people like different foods and drinks.I like Jiaozi.It’s my favorite food. (板书并解释food，教学该句并要求掌握。) food It’s my favorite food.T: That means I like Jiaozi very much.(问学生) T: S, what’s your favorite food? 4S: My favorite food is rice/chicken … 4 T: S, what’s your favorite drink? 5S: My favorite drink is milk/juice … 5
T: Well.S, do you know what Michael’s favorite food is? 6S: Sorry, I don’t know.6T: OK.Now let’s come to learn 1a, and then you can find the answer.2.(播放1a录音，完成下列表格，板书。) T: OK.Please listen to the tape.Then fill out the table on the blackboard. Name For Breakfast For Lunch For Supper Michael 3.(重放1a录音，学生跟读，注意语音语调。完成1a。) T: Listen again and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.4.(学生两人一组根据1a编对话并表演。)
T: Well.Now work in pairs and make a conversation similar to 1a. Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:8分钟) 结合学生用餐习惯，开展探究和讨论活动，提高学生学习和运用语言的能力。
1.(学生分组，调查组内同学的用餐习惯。然后每组选一个代表，汇报调查结果，完成1b。) T: OK.Now we know what Michael usually have for three meals.Now please ask your clamates about their three meals and fill out the table in 1b.Then I’ll ask some of you to report it like this: X X usually has … for breakfast.He/She usually has … for lunch, and has … for supper.You can ask and answer after the following example.Example: A: What do you usually have for …? B: I usually have … .2.(听3录音，学唱歌曲，拓展食物和饮料类名词。) 3.Homework: (1)把Section A，B中表示建议、接受和拒绝的语句抄在练习本上。 (2)把Section A，B中所有食物类名词，按可数名词和不可数名词分类列在练习本上。 板书设计：
What would you like to drink? 36
Section B Wait a moment, please.What do you usually have for …? have breakfast It’s my favorite food.have lunch May/Can/Could I …? have supper Would you like something to drink? Yes.A gla of …, please. Section C The main activity is 1a.本课重点活动是1a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn some new words and phrases: eat, out, eat out, dinner, have dinner, why, Why not …? 2.Learn some useful sentences about having meals and making suggestions: (1)—Would you like to have dinner with me?—Yes, I’d like to.(2)—What would you like to eat?—Let me see.(3)—Why not have some fish and eggs?—Good idea.(4)—Help yourself to some fish.—Thanks.(5)Here you are.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 录音机/图片/投影仪/小黑板 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:6分钟) 通过歌曲、图片、师生互动等形式，培养学生的学习兴趣。复习重点知识，导入新课。 1.(师生共唱歌曲《Old McDonald Had a Shop》，调节课堂气氛，提高学生的学习兴趣。) 2.(利用图片，快速复习食物名称。) T: Look at these pictures.Let’s say them out as quickly as poible.
S: Rice.(教师出示rice图片。) 1
S:
Hamburger.(出示hamburger图片。) 2 S: … 3… 3.(让学生两人一组模仿Section B，2a，表演一段就餐对话，导入新课。)
T: Well done! Please make a conversation about having meals with your partner.Then I’ll ask some pairs to act out in
the front.
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:14分钟) 通过创设情景，师生问答等形式，学习本课新单词及新句型。 1.(师生问答，谈论学生的日常饮食，复习有关句型，并引出本课新知识。)
T: What do you usually have for breakfast? S: I usually have … for breakfast.1 T: What about lunch? S: I usually have … 1 T: Do you often eat Jiaozi for supper? S: Yes.I like it very much.1 (板书并要求学生掌握。) 37
eat T: S, would you like some Jiaozi? 2 S: Yes, please./No, thanks.2 T: S, would you like some vegetables? 3 S: Yes, please./No, thanks.3 T: S, would you like to have breakfast with me?
4S: Yes, I’d like to.(帮助学生回答。) 4 (板书并要求学生掌握。) —Would you like to do sth.? —Yes, I’d like to.(教师讲解其用法。师生操练。) T: Would you like to have lunch with me? Ss: Yes, I’d like to.T: Would you like to have dinner with me? Ss: Yes, I’d like to.(板书并要求学生掌握。) dinner, have dinner T: Where do you often have dinner? Ss: I often have dinner at home.T: I often eat at home, too.But sometimes I eat out. (板书并要求学生掌握。) eat out T: S, would you like to eat out with me? 5S: Yes, I’d like to.5 T: What would you like to eat? S: I’d like some … 5 T: What about some chicken? S: Good idea.5 T: I can also say“Why not have some chicken?”
(板书并要求学生掌握。) —Why not do sth.? —Good idea.(师生操练。) T: S, why not have some apple juice? 6S: Good idea.6 T: S, why not have some fish? 7S: Good idea.7 T: Very good, sit down, please.S, if you want to ask your clamates to eat apples here.What do you say? 8S: Help yourself to some apples.8 Ss: Thank you./Thanks.T: Good, but you should say: Help yourselves to some apples.(教师应加重语气，强调yourselves。) (然后教师拿起一个苹果递给一个学生说。) T: Here you are. S: Thank you./Thanks.9(板书并让学生猜测句子的意思，要求学生掌握。) Here you are.T: OK.Do you want to know where the children have dinner? Please listen to the tape and find out the answer.2.(播放1a录音，学生听并找出答案。核对答案。) 38
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步
巩固(时间:8分钟) 通过角色表演，进一步巩固就餐用语。培养学生用所学语言进行交际的能力。 1.(重播1a录音，让学生听录音，完成下列问题。)
T: Listen to the tape again and complete the following questions. (1) Do they eat out? (2) What do they eat? (3) Do they have some drinks? 2.(再播1a，让学生跟读，注意语音语调，加深理解。) T: Listen to the tape again and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.3.(角色表演：学生三人一组，分角色表演1a。然后挑选几组上台表演，并给予鼓励。完成1b。) T: OK.Now please practice the dialog in groups of three.Then I’ll ask some groups to come to the front and role-play.Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:9分钟) 通过排序、填空和给句子配对等活动，帮助学生继续操练本话题的功能语言项目，以提高学生的综合语言运用能力。 1.(看2的图画，对句子进行正确排序，核对答案。完成2。) T: Well done.Next, look at the picture in 2 on Page 74.Can you gue where they are? Ss: They are in the shop.T: And what do they say? Read the following sentences first.Then put them into the correct order to make a conversation.(核对答案。) T: Boys and girls, I’ll divide you into two groups.Boys act the bo.(教师可以用汉语解释bo。) Girls act the customer.(教师用汉语解释customer。) Are you ready? Go.Boys: May I help you, sir? Girls: Yes, two hamburgers, please.Boys: Would you like something to drink? Girls: No, thanks.Boys: OK.16 yuan, please.Girls: Here you are.2.(将3中的图贴在黑板上，师生讨论笑脸的含义。学生两人一组问答，然后完成3的文章。) T: Look at the pictures on the blackboard.Talk about them in pairs.(1)S: Do you like chicken? 1S: Yes, I like it a little.2S: Do you like hamburgers? 1S: Yes, I like them very much.2 (2)S: Do you like fish? 3S: Yes.It’s my favorite food.4S: Do you like bananas? 3S: No, I don’t like them at all.4T: Nice work! Now let’s complete the paage in 3.Then we will check the answers together.(核对答案。) 3.(用投影仪或小黑板展示4中两组句子，让学生配对，以提高他们对句子的运用能力，完成4。核对答案。)
Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:8分钟) 通过接力活动及讨论学生的饮食情况，提高学生听说读写的综合语言技能。 1.(接力比赛。) (方案一：看谁说得对。) 39
(教师念some，学生接食物类名词，且要注意是否加s。学生按座位顺序快速轮流说，食物名称不得重复，说错者退出比赛，最后剩下的同学为获胜者。) (方案二：比一比谁快。) (1)(事先准备两份内容相同的卡片，卡片上给出的是本话题的功能句。) (2)(将全班同学分成两组并站成两路纵队，每组的第一位同学用卡片上的第一个问题提问，第二位同学回答，然后第二位同学用卡片上下一问题提问，第三位同学回答，问完问题的同学站到本队的最后，当再次轮到第一位同学提问时，一个赛程结束，教师记下两组分别花费的时间，花费时间短且问答准确率高的组获胜。) 2.(让学生两人一组讨论自己的饮食情况，并模仿3写成短文。学生互评，然后教师挑选一个学生的作文进行点评。) 3.Homework:
(1)让学生运用所学的句型自己编一个关于就餐的对话，并写在练习本上。 (2)询问亲友，或上网查询本地有哪些名菜。 板书设计： What would you like to drink? Section C eat out have dinner/have supper Here you are.Thanks.—Would you like to do …? —Yes, I’d like/love to.—Why not have some fish and eggs? —Good idea.—What about some vegetables? —Good idea.
Section D The main activities are 1, 2a and 4.本课重点活动是1，2a和4。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.Learn some phonetic symbols:/h/, /r/, /w/, /j/ 2.Learn some new words and a phrase:dear, kind, such as, be
3.Review ordering food and having meals.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 录音机/单词卡片/多媒体课件/投影仪或小黑板/图片/信封 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案 Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:12分钟) 通过竞赛、表演、游戏等方式，帮助学生进一步巩固本话题的功能语言。 1.(头脑风暴，复习本话题所有的词汇。)
(将学生分成四组，组之间进行抢答。若某一组员回答不上来，组内其他组员三秒内有一次机会给予帮助。若无人帮助，机会转给其他组。答对一次，画一面红旗，评出优胜组，并颁发“最佳团体奖”。培养学生集体荣誉感。) T: Hello, boys and girls.Do you remember all the words in the topic? Now let’s PK.I’ll divide you into four groups.Try your best to speak out the word quickly when I say it in Chinese.The group which get the most red flags will be winner.Are you clear? Please go.(教师示范。) T: 鸡肉 S: chicken 1 T: 鱼肉 S: fish 22.(男女挑战赛，复习本话题的句型。) (把全班分成男、女两大组，每组依次各出一人，采用一问一答式，相互交换，每个人只有一次机会，问一句或答一句可得一面红旗，组内相同的问句不能超过三次，否则违规。) 40
T: OK.Now boys can make a challenge for girls by asking and answering.You can use the important sentences in the topic.You can begin like this: (教师和一学生示范。) T: Would you like some eggs? S: Yes, please./No, thanks.3(交换角色。) S: Here you are.T: Thank you.3(教师观察，若本话题所有句型均已提到，且大部分学生已参与，即可停止。) 3.(即兴表演：三人一组，其中一人为waiter/waitre，运用所学就餐用语，演一个在酒店/饭店用餐的短剧。) 4.(给单词贴尾巴，复习可数名词与不可数名词。) (教师把以前所学和本单元所有表示食物/饮料类的名称写在动物形的纸板上，贴在黑板上，然后把s写在部分尾巴形的纸板上；另一部分尾巴什么也不写，表示不加s，即不可数名词。给动物贴上正确的尾巴。) 5.(教师出示一封信，引入新课题。)
T: What’s this? Ss: It’s a letter.T: Yes, do you know how to write an English letter? (用汉语翻译此句。) Ss: No, we don’t know.T: OK.I’ll teach you how to write an English letter today.(老师做写的动作。) (导入2a。) Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:10分钟) 学习2a短文。帮助学生了解并掌握英文信件的书写格式，拓展他们的文化视野。 1.(教师用幻灯片出示各种形式的英文信件，让学生整体感知。也可以打印出来，让学生传阅, 了解英文写作的多样性。)
T: Look at these letters and see how English people write letters. 2.(教师用课件或黑板展示英文信件的基本框架。)
Dear
…,
×××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××××
Yours, ××× (板书并要求学生掌握。)
dear
T: Do you know this word? Ss: Yes.亲爱的。(随着大众媒体的传播，学生都知道它。) (教师解释。) T: In English letters, we usually use (翻译该词) this word to start a letter, not only say it to young men or young women, but also to old people or kids.(教师举例。) T: Dear … (用班上学生的姓名，有男也有女。) (教师提醒学生注意“Dear … ,”的标点符号。) Dear Sam, √ Dear Sam: × (教师指着小黑板/课件中信的正文部分。) T: This is the body of a letter.Here you can write something that you want to tell the receiver.(用同样的方法，讲解信的结尾及签名。) T: This part is the end of a letter.People usually use “Yours,” and the writer has to write his/her name here.(教师展示几封内容简短的英语信件，以增强学生印象，了解文化常识。) 3.(教师展示两幅图片，一幅是一个凶神恶煞的壮汉正对一个弱者大动干戈，另一幅是一个 小朋友正给一个流浪汉食物。) T: Do you like this man? (出示图片。) Ss:No.We don’t like him at all.T: Neither do I.Because he is not kind.What about the boy? (出示另一图片。) Ss:We like him very much. T: Good.The boy is very kind.(板书让学生猜测词意，然后领读并要求学生掌握。) 41
kind (然后教师用
be kind to说出下列四句话，帮助学生加深对kind的理解，以此引出生词be。) 例如: T: We should be(用汉语翻译该词) kind to other people. Teachers should be kind to students. We should be kind to our parents.We should be kind to each other.(板书，解释，然后领读，要求学生掌握。) be (am, is, are) (教师用汉语解释be的用法，并举例。) T: I’m glad to be here.I’m happy to be with you.Are you glad to be a student of mine? Do you want to be a teacher when you grow up? (教师在叙述时，应重读be，突出be动词。) 4.(播放2a录音，学生跟读，并画出有用的短语。) T: OK.Here’s a letter for Jack.Do you want to know who writes it? Please listen to the tape and repeat.Then underline the useful phrases.(核对答案。) T: Who is the letter from? Ss: Jane.T: Right.We know the phrases in the letter are very important, such as be kind to, have dinner, be glad to be here.Can you remember them? Ss: Yes.(教师板书such as让学生猜测其意，然后领读并要求学生掌握。)
such as
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:8分钟) 根据关键词，复述2a。完成2b并学习四个辅音。 1.(让学生再读短文，回答下面两个问题，加深对2a的理解。) T: Please read 2a again.Then answer the following questions. (1) Does Jane often have dinner with her friends? (2) What does she like to eat? (核对答案。) 2.(要求学生根据关键词复述信的内容，完成2a。)
(小黑板出示关键词。)
Dear, in China, many friends, kind, have dinner, like Chinese food, such as … , be nice, be very glad to be here, Yours, Jane 3.(让学生根据2a给自己的朋友写一封信。提醒学生注意格式。教师检查完毕，选几位学生大声朗读自己的信件，完成2b。) 4.(教师将1的例词写在黑板上，让学生读出单词，并注意画线部分辅音字母的读音。) /h/ head hand have house /r/ red ruler sorry river /w/ welcome worker woman watch /j/ your young yellow year 5.(播放1录音，学生跟读。) 6.(小组活动。把全班同学分成四组，为上述音标补充单词，每一组同学就某个音标补充单词。) T: OK, you do very well.Now let’s add other words to each phonetics.For example, Group 1 adds words to /h/.Group 2 adds words to /r/.Group 3 adds words to /w/.Group 4 adds words to /j/.Do you understand? You can find the words in your books.Ss:Yes.42
T: OK.Let’s begin.… Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10
分钟) 通过听说读写等练习，在不同情境中练习目标语言，展开任务型活动，培养学生综合运用语言的技能。 1.(找同义句。在本单元中，学习了不少同义句，让学生掌握这些句子，明白英语这门语言的灵活性。) (用小黑板或投影仪，列出下列句子。) (1) Why not have some milk? (2) What would you like to drink? (3) What would you like to eat? A (4) I like Chinese food very much.(5) I want some bread.
(6) Would you like to have dinner with me? (7) Would you like some eggs? A.Do you want some eggs?
B.What about having dinner with me? C.I’d like some bread.
B D.Chinese food is my favorite.E.Would you like something to eat? F.Would you like something to drink? G.What about some milk? T: Nice work.Well, in the topic we know many same meaning sentences.Please look at the blackboard, read the sentences in Column A first, and then find the same meaning sentences in Column B.
(学生配对完毕后，教师核对答案并作解释。) 2.(口头翻译句子，让学生加深对句型的记忆。)
T: Please change the sentences into Chinese or English orally.S, please.Would you like some milk? 1 S: 你想要点牛奶吗？ 1 T: 你想喝点什么吗？S, please.2 S: What would you like to drink?/Would you like something to drink? 2… (对于表现好的学生要给予表扬，对于有困难者，要给予提示。鼓励他们尽量开口说英语。) 3.(播放3b录音，让学生跟读，模仿语音语调，加深巩固。) 4.(教师从3b中抽取五个句子听写，完成3b。) T: Now, let’s have a dictation.(1)Would you like something to drink?(2)What do you usually have for breakfast? (3)May I take your order, sir?(4)Help yourself to some fish.(5)Wait a moment, please.5.(学生看3a，朗读单词，掌握可数名词与不可数名词。教师可适当补充，完成3a。) Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:5分钟) 通过组织英语角活动，为学生提供实际运用英语的机会，提高学生的学习兴趣和语言运用能力。 1.(小小英语角，带着任务去交谈。) (教师把学生分成六人一组，组织一个小英语角，不准用汉语。运用前面所学知识，谈论家庭、食物。教师在各小组间走动，提供帮助，鼓励学生大胆发言，完成
4(1)中表格。) T: Boys and girls, would you like to go to the English Corner with me? (可以用汉语解释the English Corner。) Ss: Yes.We’d like to.T: OK.Now I’ll divide you into many groups, six members in a group.Talk about your family members, food and drink at the English Corner using the questions, such as: (1) What does your father/mother/ … do? (2) Where does he/she work? (3)What’s his/her favorite food? (4) What does he/she usually like to drink? … You can only speak English at the English Corner.Then fill out the table in 4(1).2.Homework： (1)找一些自己的玩具、书刊，带到学校，以备下节课使用。 43
把本单元所学的食物类名词归类。) 第一种方法：按食物和饮料归类。 第二种方法：按可数与不可数归类。 (3)根据4(1)中谈话内容，写作文，四十个词左右。教师要求作文必须用真实姓名，且必须写其他人，内容要包括他人的个人信息，家庭信息。完成4(2)。 板书设计：
What would you like to drink? Section D have… for… (三餐名称) (2)(They are all kind to me.be glad to be here I like Chinese food very much, such as … be kind to sb.I’m very glad to be here.have dinner with sb.something to eat/drink Unit 4 Having Fun Topic 1 What can I do for you? Section A The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。 Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标 1.(1)Learn some useful words and phrases:
madam, buy, over, there, over there, try, try on, How much …? (2)Learn some new words about numbers: thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, hundred
2.Learn some expreions about shopping: (1)—What can I do for you, madam?—I want to buy some clothes for my daughter.(2)—Can I try it on?—Sure.(3)It looks very nice on you.(4)That’s fine.We’ll take it.3.Learn how to expre and respond to the thanks: —Thanks a lot.—Not at all.4.Learn how to ask and state prices: —How much is it?—It’s only seventy yuan.
5.Learn how to make suggestions: —What about this one?—All right.Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具 图片/彩色粉笔/小黑板/价格标签/录音机/实物 Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:5分钟) 由已学过的数字导入新数字，整合教学内容，完成2a。 1.(教师在黑板上贴一大张白纸，上面已事先画好一个动物，但线条很浅，在线条上分布0-20之间的数字，直到数字连接完毕，方可显现动物轮廓。) T: Who can help me? 44
S: I can.1 T: Good, listen and match (运用肢体语言，让学生明白match意思是“连接”。) the numbers, OK? S: OK.1 T: Please match number“0”to“20”.(学生连线，从0到20，完毕。教师面向大家。)
T: What can you see
推荐第7篇：秋八年级上册英语全册教案(仁爱英语)
2017年秋八年级上册英语全册教案(仁爱英语)
篇1：2016年秋仁爱英语八年级上册教案全册
2016年秋仁爱英语八年级上册教案全册共194 页
Unit 1 Playing Sports Topic 1 Are you going to play basketball? Section A The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: almost, against, term, cheer, cheer … on, team, win, row, quite, bit, quite a bit / a lot, join, club, skate, volleyball, tennis, table tennis 2.Learn some useful sentences: (1)I saw you play basketball almost every day during the summer holidays. (2)Would you like to come and cheer us on? 3.Learn the future tense with be going to: (1)We are going to have a basketball game against Cla Three on Sunday. (2)Are you going to join the school rowing club? 4.Talk about preferences: —Which sport do you prefer, cycling or rowing? —I prefer rowing. 5.Talk about sports and games. Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具
图片/海报/教学挂图/录音机/小黑板
Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步
复习(时间:7分钟) 复习学过的运动项目名称，引出生词。
1.(展示一些有关运动的图片，并通过师生对话，引出新的运动项目名称。) T: you enjoy yourselves during your summer holidays? What did you do during your holidays? Did you do sports during your summer holidays? Ss: … )
’s review some sports and learn some new ones.(展示学生在打篮球的图片。) T: Look at the picture.Do you know what they are doing? S1, please. S1: They are playing basketball. T: Do you like playing basketball? S1: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. T: ) 1(展示学生在打排球的图片。) T: What are they doing? S2, do you know? S2教师帮助该生回答。) ) (用同样的方式引出生词cycle, row, skate, tennis, table tennis, ski。) ；掌握row, skate, tennis, table tennis。)
的用法。) T: Which sport do you like better, cycling or rowing? S3: Rowing. T: Good! The phrase “like … better” means “”. ) T: S4, which sport do you prefer, basketball or soccer? S4: I prefer basketball. …
Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:10分钟) 通过师生对话，呈现1a中部分生词及功能句，并使学生初步掌握be going to句型。
1.(利用plan to do sth.，导入“be going to+do”结构。) T: I’m very glad you all like doing sports and know a lot about them.Do you want to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon? S1, please. S1: Yes, I do. T: So you plan to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon, right? S1 : Yes. T:)
be going to.OK, boys and girls? Ss: OK. T: I plan to go out for dinner tonight.S2, please. S2: You are going to go out for dinner tonight. T: I plan to climb mountains tomorrow.S3, please. S3: You are going to climb mountains tomorrow.
T: Good! When we expre something that is going to happen or we plan to do something, we can use be going to. 2.(教师让几个学生说说明天户外活动的打算，并引出be going to结构的一般疑问句式，过渡到1a。) T: OK, S4, please tell me what you plan to do tomorrow afternoon. S4: I’m going to swim with my brother tomorrow afternoon. S4: (教师视学生掌握的情况来决定是否要进行更多的操练。) 3.(展示一幅即将进行篮球赛的海报，引出单词against, cheer和短语cheer … on。) T: Now look at the poster.Here is the news.Our cla is going to have a Ss:Yes, we ’d love to./I’d love to. ) 1a。) T: Look at this picture.They are Kangkang and Michael.What are they Can you gue? Please listen to 1a and then answer the following questions. 4.(学生朗读1a，画出疑难点和关键词，然后教师解释疑难点。) Step 3 Consolidation 第三步
巩固(时间:10分钟) 创设情景，编对话，在真实的语境中培养学生口头交流能力。 1.(根据小黑板上的关键词，分角色表演对话。) T: OK.Now you can use the key words above to act out the dialog in roles. 2.(教师引导学生，通过讨论新学期的计划来操练be going to+do句型。) (教师先做示范，然后让学生两人一组练习。) T: S1, what are you going to do this term? S1: I’m going to learn English better. T: What about you, S2? S2: I’m going to study math hard. T: Oh, it’s a good plan.S3, do you know what your partner is going to do? S3: Yes.He is going to learn rowing. T: Discu with your partner what you are going to do this term. 3.(创设情景，依据1a编对话，巩固1a及be going to+do句型，完成1b。) T: Just now you talked about your plans for this term.Now suppose you meet your clamate on the playground and you want to talk about your plans for this week.Please make a similar conversation with your partner according to 1a.You can use the key words on the blackboard.talking about? basketball game
(学生两人一组编对话，教师进行鼓励启发，必要时应给予帮助。) Example: S4: Hi, S5. S5: Hi, S4.I am going to play … Are you going to play with us? S4: I’m afraid I can’t.I have to do my homework first.By the way, I saw you play … almost every day during the summer holidays. S5: Yes.You know I am going to play in the … game against Cla 2 this Saturday.Would you like to come and cheer us on? S4: Of course.I’d love to.And I hope you will win. (让几组学生到教室前面表演类似的对话，评出最佳表演组及最佳演员等。) (教师出示2中运动项目的图片，引导学生巩固be going to + do句型，使他们熟练掌握其用法，并自然过渡到2。) Step 4 Practice 第四步
练习(时间:10分钟) 完成2和3，培养学生听说能力，并通过大量操练，使他们熟练运用含有be going to的一般疑问句及掌握prefer的用法。
1.(通过看图片，练习be going to的用法，导入2。) T: Look at the pictures, what are they going to do? Ss: (Picture 1) They are going to go skating. (Picture 2) They are going to go skiing. …
T: Which sport do you prefer, … or …? S1: I prefer …
T: What about you, S2? S2: I prefer …
T: S3, do you often go swimming? S3: T: Good.You can also say “.“Do you often go swimming?” means “Do you go swimming ” 。) 4S4: Yes, quite a lot/a bit. T: S5, do you go skiing much? S5: Yes, quite a lot / a bit.(肯) S6: No, seldom.(否) T: Oh, you don’
t like sports.It isn’there. ) S7: I am going to join the school rowing club.S8: …
(学生两人一组完成2，除了可以用书上所给的运动名称，也可用他们所知道的其他运动名称进行对话。) 2.(让学生听3录音，并完成3。) T: Michael and Kangkang like doing sports a lot.Do you want to know what sports they often do on weekends? Listen to the tape, then fill in the chart in 3. (再放录音3，核对答案。) 3.(做一个运用“be going to+do”句型的游戏。) (挑选若干学生上台，做关于运动的动作，该动作要能使同学们明白并成功猜出运动名称。猜到的同学要用be going to+do询问做动作的同学，以证实自己的猜测是否正确。) T: Please do an action about your favorite sport. (S10表演一个动作。) S9: Are you going to play basketball? S10: No, I’m not. S9: Are you going to play volleyball? S10: Yes, I am. …
(让学生尽量多表演动作。) Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:8分钟) 通过作报告和写句子，培养学生综合运用本课所学语法及重要句型的能力。
1.(小组活动，在小组中做采访并向全班同学作报告。) T: Work in groups.Ask your partner the following questions, then give a report to your clamates. (1)Which sport do you prefer, … or …? (2)Do you … much? (3)Are you going to …
next week? 2.Homework: 用be going to造五个句子，要求用不同的人称、句式。 Section B The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: dream, grow, grow up, future, in the future, job, active, break, record, gold, give up, shame, single 2.Go on learning the future tense with be going to: 篇2：2016年秋仁爱英语八年级上册教案全册
Unit 1 Playing Sports Topic 1 Are you going to play basketball? Section A The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: almost, against, term, cheer, cheer … on, team, win, row, quite, bit, quite a bit / a lot, join, club, skate, volleyball, tennis, table tennis 2.Learn some useful sentences: (1)I saw you play basketball almost every day during the summer holidays. (2)Would you like to come and cheer us on? 3.Learn the future tense with be going to: (1)We are going to have a basketball game against Cla Three on Sunday. (2)Are you going to join the school rowing club? 4.Talk about preferences: —Which sport do you prefer, cycling or rowing? —I prefer rowing. 5.Talk about sports and games. Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具
图片/海报/教学挂图/录音机/小黑板
Ⅲ.Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步
复习(时间:7分钟) 复习学过的运动项目名称，引出生词。
1.(展示一些有关运动的图片，并通过师生对话，引出新的运动项目名称。) T: you enjoy yourselves during your summer holidays? What did you do during your holidays? Did you do sports during your summer holidays? Ss: … ) ’s review some sports and learn some new ones.(展示学生在打篮球的图片。) T: Look at the picture.Do you know what they are doing? S1, please. S1: They are playing basketball. T: Do you like playing basketball? S1: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. T: (板书并要求学生掌握。) 1(展示学生在打排球的图片。)
T: What are they doing? S2, do you know? S2教师帮助该生回答。) ) cycle, row, skate, tennis, table tennis, ski。) ；掌握row, skate, tennis, table tennis。)
2.(用黑板上有关运动的生词操练，导出prefer的用法。) T: Which sport do you like better, cycling or rowing? S3: Rowing. T: Good! The phrase “like … better” means “”. ) T: S4, which sport do you prefer, basketball or soccer? S4: I prefer basketball. …
Step 2 Presentation 第二步
呈现(时间:10分钟) 通过师生对话，呈现1a中部分生词及功能句，并使学生初步掌握be going to句型。
1.(利用plan to do sth.，导入“be going to+do”结构。) T: I’m very glad you all like doing sports and know a lot about them.Do you want to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon? S1, please. S1: Yes, I do. T: So you plan to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon, right? S1 : Yes. T:) be going to.OK, boys and girls? Ss: OK. T: I plan to go out for dinner tonight.S2, please. S2: You are going to go out for dinner tonight. T: I plan to climb mountains tomorrow.S3, please. S3: You are going to climb mountains tomorrow. T: Good! When we expre something that is going to happen or we plan to do something, we can use going to. 2.(教师让几个学生说说明天户外活动的打算，并引出be going to结构的一般疑问句式，过渡到1a。) T: OK, S4, please tell me what you plan to do tomorrow afternoon. S4: I’m going to swim with my brother tomorrow afternoon. S 4 : be
(教师视学生掌握的情况来决定是否要进行更多的操练。) 3.(展示一幅即将进行篮球赛的海报，引出单词against, cheer和短语cheer … on。) T: Now look at the poster.Here is the news.Our cla is going to have a Ss:Yes, we’d love to./I’d love to.) (出示教学挂图，让学生看图片猜测对话内容，导入1a。) T: Look at this picture.They are Kangkang and Michael.What are they Can you gue? Please listen to 1a and then answer the following questions.4.(学生朗读1a，画出疑难点和关键词，然后教师解释疑难点。) Step 3 Consolidation 第三步
巩固(时间:10分钟) 创设情景，编对话，在真实的语境中培养学生口头交流能力。
1.(根据小黑板上的关键词，分角色表演对话。) T: OK.Now you can use the key words above to act out the dialog in roles. 2.(教师引导学生，通过讨论新学期的计划来操练be going to+do句型。) (教师先做示范，然后让学生两人一组练习。) T: S1, what are you going to do this term? S1: I’m going to learn English better. T: What about you, S2? S2: I’m going to study math hard. T: Oh, it’s a good plan.S3, do you know what your partner is going to do? S3 : Yes.He is going to learn rowing. T: Discu with your partner what you are going to do this term. 3.(创设情景，依据1a编对话，巩固1a及be going to+do句型，完成1b。) T: Just now you talked about your plans for this term.Now suppose you meet your clamate on the playground and you want to talk about your plans for this week.Please make a similar conversation with your partner according to 1a.You can use the key words on the blackboard. (学生两人一组编对话，教师进行鼓励启发，必要时应给予帮助。) Example: S4: Hi, S5. S5: Hi, S4.I am going to play … Are you going to play with us? S4: I’m afraid I can’t.I have to do my homework first.By the way, I saw you play … almost every day during the summer holidays. S5: Yes.You know I am going to play in the … game against Cla 2 this Saturday.Would you like to come and basketball game talking about? cheer us on? S4: Of course.I’d love to.And I hope you will win. (让几组学生到教室前面表演类似的对话，评出最佳表演组及最佳演员等。) (教师出示2中运动项目的图片，引导学生巩固be going to + do句型，使他们熟练掌握其用法，并自然过渡到2。) Step 4 Practice 第四步
练习(时间:10分钟) 完成2和3，培养学生听说能力，并通过大量操练，使他们熟练运用含有be going to的一般疑问句及掌握prefer的用法。
1.(通过看图片，练习be going to的用法，导入2。) T: Look at the pictures, what are they going to do?
Ss: (Picture 1) They are going to go skating. (Picture 2) They are going to go skiing. …
T: Which sport do you prefer, … or …? S1: I prefer … T: What about you, S2? S2: I prefer …
T: S3, do you often go swimming? S3: T: Good.You can also say “.“Do you often go swimming?” means “Do you go swimming ” 。) 4S4: Yes, quite a lot/a bit. T: S5, do you go skiing much? S5: Yes, quite a lot / a bit.(肯) S6: No, seldom.(否) T: Oh, you don’
t like sports.It isn’there. ) S7: I am going to join the school rowing club. S8: …
(学生两人一组完成2，除了可以用书上所给的运动名称，也可用他们所知道的其他运动名称进行对话。) 2.(让学生听3录音，并完成3。) T: Michael and Kangkang like doing sports a lot.Do you want to know what sports they often do on weekends? Listen to the tape, then fill in the chart in 3. (再放录音3，核对答案。) 3.(做一个运用“be going to+do”句型的游戏。) (挑选若干学生上台，做关于运动的动作，该动作要能使同学们明白并成功猜出运动名称。猜到的同学要用be going to+do询问做动作的同学，以证实自己的猜测是否正确。) T: Please do an action about your favorite sport.
(S10表演一个动作。) S9: Are you going to play basketball? S10: No, I’m not. S9: Are you going to play volleyball? S10: Yes, I am. …
(让学生尽量多表演动作。) Step 5 Project 第五步
综合探究活动(时间:8分钟) 通过作报告和写句子，培养学生综合运用本课所学语法及重要句型的能力。
1.(小组活动，在小组中做采访并向全班同学作报告。) T: Work in groups.Ask your partner the following questions, then give a report to your clamates. (1)Which sport do you prefer, … or …? (2)Do you … much? (3)Are you going to …
next week? 2.Homework: 用be going to造五个句子，要求用不同的人称、句式。 板书设计： Section B The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words and phrases: dream, grow, grow up, future, in the future, job, active, break, record, gold, give up, shame, single 2.Go on learning the future tense with be going to: —What are you going to be when you grow up? —I’m going to be a dancer. 3.Talk about the favorite sports and players: (1)—What’s your favorite sport, Maria? —Basketball, of course. (2)—Who’s your favorite player? —LeBron James./ I like Yao Ming best. Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具
图片/小黑板/录音机
篇3：2017年仁爱版八年级上期末英语试卷含答案
2016年秋季期末试卷
______八年级英语
___（满分：150分；考试时间：120分钟；考试形式：闭卷）
__号注意：本试卷分为“试卷”和“答题卡”两部分，答题时请按答题卡中的“注意事项”要求认真作）答，答案写在答题卡上相应位置。
考（座第一部分
听力（四大题，满分30分）
____I.听音选图，听句子，根据你所听到的内容，选择正确的图画顺序。每个句子读两遍。(6分 ) __________名姓_____________级班
1、________
2、________ 3________ 4.________ 5._________ 6._______ II.听对话，根据你所听到的内容选择正确的答案，每段对话读两遍。（12分）
第一节
听下面4段对话，每段对话后有1个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选择最 佳选项。（6分）
（ ）7.Where does the woman come from ? 校学A.America. B.England. C.Germany. （ ）8.What does the boy doing ? A.He was reading. B.He was sleeping. C.He was watching TV. （ ）9.What kind of music does the woman like now ? A.Folk music.B.Claical music. C.Rock music. （ ）10.How long did it take to build the bridge? A.More than 3 years.B.Le than 3 years.C.Over 13 years. 第二节
听下面2段对话，每段对话后有2个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选择最佳选项。（6分）
听下面一段材料，回答第
11、12题。( ) 11.What’s John’s favorite sport ?. A.Swimming. B.Playing basketball. C.Playing baseball. ( )12.How often does John play baseball? A.Seldom. B.Sometimes.C.Often.听下面一段材料，回答第
13、14题。
( )13 Who is the woman going to spend her summer holiday with ? A.Her husband.B.Her sister.C.Her brother.( )14.How will the boy go ? A.By train.B.By plane.C.By bus. III．听短文，根据你所听到的内容，选择正确的答案，短文读两遍。（6分） ( )15.Mr.Black was usually _________ When he went home. A.pleased.B.tired. C.excited. ( )16.Every summer she travels with her _________. A.watching TV.B.reading.C.lying in bed. ( )17.Mr.Watt wanted to speak to _________ ?
A.Mr.Black. B.Mrs.Jack.C.Mr.Smith. ( )18.Both Mr.Black and Mr.Watt were very _________. A.angry. B.sad.C.happy.,短文读两遍。（6分）19.____________ 20.____________ 21.____________ 22.____________
笔试部分（满分120分）
Part One:语言知识运用（35分）
I.选择填空。从A、B、C三个选项中选出能填入句中空格的最佳答案。（15分） ()23.-- ________ sweet music! Let’s listen to it again. --OK. A.What aB.WhatC.How ()24.--There ____ a wonderful movie tomorrow.Would you like to watch it with me? --Sure, I’d love to. A.is going to haveB.haveC.is going to be ( )25.—What were you doing at this time yesterday? —We _______ in the claroom. A.read B.were reading C.are reading ( )26.He eats _______ food, so he is _______ fat. A.much too; too muchB.too much; much too C.much too; the many ( )27.You must give up_____.It’s bad for your health. A.smokingB.smoke C.to smoke ( )28.－Would you mind my smoking here? ――＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿
A.Sorry, you’d better not.. B.Yes, you can.C No, you can’t smoke ( ) 29.I see you_____ basketball almost every day. A.playB.to playC.playing ( )30.—My aunt goes to climb Mount Gu every Sunday. —Oh? But she _______ hate climbing mountains. A.use to B.used to C.uses to ( )31.—Must I park my car behind the building? —No, you _______.You _______ park it here. A.mustn’t; may B.may not; mustC.don’t have to; may ( )32.She told us a story, and her voice sounded _______.We’re interested in it. A.sweet B.small C.clearly ( )33.Let’s go swimming,_______? A.don’t youB.shall we C.will you ( )34.—I think claical music is pleasant. —_______ I think it’s boring. A.I agree.B.I think so.C.I don’t agree. ( )35.We should do more exercise to keep ______ fit. A.we B.our C.ourselves ( )36.—Do you have _______ to say today? —No, nothing. A.anything important B.important something C.something important ( )37.It’s important to brush you _________ twice a day. A.tooth B.tooths C.teeth II.补全对话 从方框中选出正确的句子补全对话。（10分） A: Hi, Lingling! B: Hi, Daming! A: Yes.What’s up? B: Tomorrow is Sally’s birthday. You know, she’s alone in China.A: That’s a good idea! You are so kind.B: . A: Yes, I’d love to. . B: Let’s make it five o’clock in the afternoon.
A: OK.Let’s meet at your house. B: She is Sally’s best friend.A: I will.See you then.III．完形填空 从每小题A、B、C、D四个选项中选择能填入空白处的最佳答案。（10分）
In the doctor’s waiting room, many people were sitting on the chair.Bob, a 12-year-old school __ , was among them.They all looked very sad, but Bob looked very was reading an interesting story.Just then the came out and called the next man.Bob up and ran into the doctor’s room . “ is the matter with you, young man?” said the doctor.Before Bob could say a word, the doctor made him down on the chair.“Now let me listen to your heart.” Bob tried to speak, the doctor told him not to say anything.“I’ll take your temperature.” Bob tried to stand up, but the doctor After a while, the doctor said, “Well, boy , you don’t have a There is nothing wrong with you. “ I know there is wrong,” said Bob.“I just come here to get some medicine for my father.()43.A.man B.woman C.boyD.girl ()44.A.happy B.tiredC.serious D.angry ()45.A.teacher B.doctor
C.actor
D.player ()46.A.gotB.took
C.jumped D.looked ()47.A.What
B.How
C.Which D.When ()48.A.go B.come
C.turn
D.lie ()49.A.so B.but C.or D.and ()50.A.paed B.followedC.forced D.stopped ()51.A.cough B.fever
C.cold
D.headache ()52.A.nothing B.everything
C.something D.anything Part Two.阅读理解（40分）
A Plants are very important.This is because plants can make food from air, water and sunlight.Animals and man cannot make food from air, water and sunlight.Animals can get their food by eating plants and other animals.Man gets his food by eating plants and animals, too.So animals and man need plants in order to live.This is why there are so many plants around us.
_There are two kinds of plants: flowering plants and non-flowering plants.Almost all the trees around ___us are flowering plants.You can know some trees from their flowers and fruit.Non-flowering plants do not ___grow flowers.You can not see many non-flowering plants around you. ___If you look carefully at the plants around you, you will find that there are many kinds of plants.Some _号plants are large and some are small.Most of them are green.Thanks to the plants around us we can live on ）考earth. （根据短文内容，从题中所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选择最佳选项。（10分） 座( )53.We need many plants around us because _______.___ A.plants can grow easily B.plants are green ___ C.we can get what we need from plants D.we like all kinds of plants ___( )54.There are so many plants around us because _______.___ A.man doesn’t need any plants B.most animals don’t eat plants __名 C.man and animals need plants to live D.the earth will become more beautiful 姓( )55.There are _______ non-flowering plants than flowering plants around us.___ A.much fewer B.much more C.much larger D.much better ___( )56.Which of the following does NOT come from a plant? ___ A.Basket.B.Bread.C.Cabbage. D.Stone forest.___( )57.Which is the best title(题目) of this paage? _级 A.Plants around us B.Man and Animals C.Live on Earth D.Food and Plants 班 B Do You Want to Be an Artist? Do you want to be an artist? Come to our club.We have guitar, violin, piano and drum leons forjust ￥240 each.You can also learn to sing or dance for just ￥180 each.If you like art, you can be satisfied, too.Art leons are just ￥200 each. 根据短文内容，从题中所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选择最佳选项。（10分）
( )58.If you want to be ______ ,come to our club. A.an artistB.a doctorC.a teacherD.a driver ( )59.How many instruments do you know in the ad? 校A.1 B.2 C.3D.4 学( )60.How much is it for the piano leon ? It’s ￥_____. A.180B.200 C.240D.480 ( )61.We can’t learn ______ in the club. A.the drumsB.swimming C.the violin D.art ( )62.If you want to learn to play the guitar and to dance ,you will pay ￥_____. A.180 B.200 C.240D.420 C James Naismith was a Canadian.He invented basketball in 1891.At that time.He was a P.E.teacher a Springfield College,.In the USA..He invented an indoor game for his students so that they could play it even in bad weather.
Do you know how to score points in the game? Well, just put the ball into the other side’s basket.You can throw the ball into the basket from any part if the court.And you can throw it with one hand or both hands.But you must follow the rules. Now, over a century later,.More and more people play basketball ..In the USA.,the NBA is very popular.People from all over the world like to watch and play basketball.They love this game.根据短文内容，从题中所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选择最佳选项。（10分） ()63.James Naismith came from_____ A.America B.China C.Canada D.Canadian ()64.In 1891, James Naismith invented_____ A.baseball B.basketball C.football D.volleyball ()65.What did James Naismith do? A.a doctorB.a student C.a worker D.a teacher ()66.Which of the following sentences is not right? A.You must put the ball into the other side’s basket to score. B.You must follow the rules. C.You can only throw it with both hands D.You can throw the ball into the basket from any part of the court.()67.When was basketball invented? A.Over 100 years agoB.100 years laterC.50 years agoD.50 years later. D Mozart was born in Austria on January 27, 1756 and died on December15,1791.He was a great claical musician..His father took him to many different countries.He played music for lots of people. .They asked him to stay in a room by himself for a week and let somebody watch the room all the time.After that, people believed that he could write beautiful music. During his short life, he studied music , taught music, played music and wrote music.Even working so hard, he could not make much money.music makes people happy, too. 从方框中所给的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，补全短文。（10分）
推荐第8篇：一年级快乐英语下册教案(全英)
Unit 1 Toys Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about toys and the new sentences: I have a new car.
2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.
3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.Teaching main : 1.The new words about toys and the new sentences: I have a new car.2.The chant and the song.Teaching difficult: It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.
Teaching aids: A recorder, tapes, cards and some toys
Leon 1 Teaching aim: I have a toy car.Key-point: A toy car Teaching methods: 1 Do pair work.2 Have a match Teaching aids: A tape recorder some toys Teaching proce:
Step 1.Warming-up Introduce myself Sing an English song.Step 2.New Leon : Learn the new words Learn the sentence: I have a toy car.Try to act the sentence Make up some new sentences Step 3.Do some practice 教学反思
Leon2 Teaching aim: I have a toy car.Key-point: I have a toy car .Teaching methods: Read the pictures Teaching aids: Some pictures tape recorder Teaching proce: Step 1.Greeting : Hello Good morning Stand up Sit down Step 2.New leon : Look at the pictures Learn the new words Learn the new sentences: I have a toy car.
Try to act the sentences Step 3.Practice the sentences one by one 教学反思
Leon3 Teaching aim: A toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Key-points: A toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and cards Teaching aids: Some cards and pictures Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing an English song Step 2.presentation : Teach the new words: car gun doll balloon teddy bear Read the words one by one Grasp the words The new phrases :a toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Practice the phrases Step 3.Practice the phrases:
I have ...Step 4.Homework: Practice the words and phrases 教学反思
Leon4 Teaching aim: Chant Key-point: Chant Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and cards Teaching aids: Some cards and pictures Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Review the words Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to know the meanings: You have a balloon.A big yellow balloon.I have a ball.A small brown ball.Purple balls, brown balls.Bounce, bounce, bounce.Bounce the ball.
Lead the students to read it Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Read it one by one or in groups Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思
Leon5 Teaching aim: Sing the song Key-point: The song Teaching methods: Listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: I have a train.My train is coming.I have a car.My car is coming.My train is coming.Oh, yeah! My car is coming.Oh, yeah!
Read it one by one Learn how to sing the song Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the song out with your own body language Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song 教学反思
Leon6 Teaching aim: Toys and the exercise Key-points: the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder tapes Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find the toys Step 3.Practice : Do the exercises together
to
Listen to the tape again Step 4.Homework :grasp the toys name 教学反思
Unit 2 Food Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about food and the new sentences: I like hamburgers.What about you? I like rice.Have a hamburger.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’
speak English in daily life.
3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to learn what food they usually have everyday.2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult:
1.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.
2.Act out the chant and the song
Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food
Leon 1 Teaching aim: food Key-points: I like hamburgers.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: hamburger Ask the question: what do you like? Teach them the answer: I like hamburgers.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思
Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: a hamburger noodles rice vegetables chicken Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: a hamburger noodles rice Vegetables chicken Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思
Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: I like noodles.What about you? I like hamburgers.What about you? I like rice.And you? And you? I like soup and vegetables, too.Me too.Yummy! Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思
Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: Have a hamburger, Mum.Yes, thanks.…
Oh, no.I’m full.Excuse me.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思
Leon5 Teaching aim: Food and the exercise Key-points: Food and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of food Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of food Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of the food 教学反思
Leon6 Teaching aim: Food and the exercise Key-points: Food and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the food cards Practice the new sentences: I like hamburgers.Have a hamburger.Yes, thanks Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the food names 教学反思
Listen to the tape again.
Unit 3 Drinks Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about drinks and the new sentences: Have some water, please.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.
3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to learn what drink they usually have everyday.2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: 3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.
4.Act out the chant and the song
Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food
Leon 1 Teaching aim: drinks Key-points: Have some water, please.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape
Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: water Teach them the sentence: Have some water, please.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思
Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: water tea coffee juice Coke Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up :
Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: water tea coffee juice Coke Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思
Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation :
Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: Would you like some water? Yes, please, please.Would you like some tea? Yes, please, please.Would you like some Coke? Yes, please, please.Would you like some juice? Yes, please, please.Would you like some coffee? Oh, no, thanks.What would you like? Tea, please.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思
Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song
Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: Have some coffee, please. Thank you.I like coffee.Have some juice, please.Thank you.I like juice.Would you like some Coke? Yes, please.What about some tea? No, thanks.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思
Leon5 Teaching aim: Drinks and the exercise Key-points: Drinks and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of drinks Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of drinks Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of the drinks 教学反思
Leon6 Teaching aim: drinks and the exercise
Key-points: drinks and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the drinks cards Practice the new sentences: Have some water, please.Thank you.I like water.Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the drinks names 教学反思
Unit 4 My body Teaching aims: Listen to the tape again.
1.Acquire the new words about body and the new sentences: Touch your nose, please.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.
3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to say the name of body 2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: 3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.
4.Act out the chant and the song
Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food
Leon 1 Teaching aim: body Key-points: Touch your nose, please.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation :
Teach the new word: nose Teach them the sentence: Touch your nose, please.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思
Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: eye ear nose face mouth Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: eye ear nose face mouth Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases
Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思
Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: Wash your hands.OK.My hands.Wash your face.OK.My face.Come on, come on.Come on and on.Hands and face, clean, clean, clean.
Point to his ears.OK.Ears.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思
Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: Touch your nose.Touch your ears.Touch your eyes.Touch your mouth.Touch your face.Touch your head.
Come on.Come on.My nose, my eyes, my mouth, my ears.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思
Leon5 Teaching aim: body and the exercise Key-points: body and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of body
Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of body Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of body 教学反思
Leon6 Teaching aim: body and the exercise Key-points: body and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the body cards Practice the new sentences: Touch your nose, please.Step 3.Practice :
Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the body names 教学反思
Unit 5 Sports Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about sports and the new sentences: I can run.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.
3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to say the name of sports 2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: Listen to the tape again.
3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.
4.Act out the chant and the song
Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food
Leon1 Teaching aim: sports Key-points: I can run.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: run Teach them the sentence: I can run.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思
Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: ski skate swim play football play table tennis
Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: ski skate swim play football play table tennis
Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思
Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: You can ski, and I can ski, too. You can skate, and I can skate, too. You can swim, and I can swim, too. You can play football.Me too. What can you do? I can play table tennis.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思
Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: What a sunny day! Let\'s go swimming.Swim, swim, swim with me.Swim, swim, swim far away.What a sunny day! Let\'s play football.Play, play, play with me.Football, football, kick this way! Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents
教学反思
Leon5 Teaching aim: sports and the exercise Key-points: sports and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of sports Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of sports Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of sports 教学反思
Leon6 Teaching aim: sports and the exercise Key-points: sports and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the sports cards Practice the new sentences: I can run.
Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the sports names .教学反思
Listen to the tape again.
Unit 6 Happy Time
Leon 1 教学目标: 1.知识目标：The students should be teached to review these words: ski, skate, swim, play football, play table tennis.2．能力目标：The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.
3.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.The teacher shoule make full use of CAI and all kinds of tools to make the English claes vivid and interesting.The main method is using pictures with words to enable students to master the new knowledge.教学重点
Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点
It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well
and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具
课件，单词卡片，等等。 教学过程： Step1 Greeting : T: Cla begins.P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…
1） 讲解书本上的图片
让学生们根据图片说一说小朋友都在做什么。抽取若干学生说一
说，让学生尽情地发挥自己的想象力。 2） 听录音连线 3） 说句子
让学生模仿录音中所说的句子练习。
Step 4.Homework To review and remember the words.板书设计: Unit6 happy time ski, skate, swim, play football, play table tennis.
Unit 6 Happy Time
Leon 2 教学目标: 1.知识目标：通过教学图片和录音更好的掌握本课的娱乐小故事。
2．能力目标：The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.
4.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.教学重点
Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点
It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具
课件，单词卡片，等等。 教学过程： Step1 Greeting :
T: Cla begins.P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…
1.通过一段游乐园的视频来导入本课的内容。
2.和同学们一起讨论，大家去游乐园之后，都会玩那些娱乐项目，大家可以用简单的英语来表达一些，请同学们先讨论一下，之后我来请同学回答。
3.通过听录音来了解本课的内容，和同学们一起观看并表演。同学们可以充分发挥自己的想象力，来编演这个教学小故事。 4.通过一些教学图片来激发同学的想象力，来更好的演示小故
事。
5.最后请同学们自己好好练习并用英语来表达我们做的运动。Eg: I can playfootball I also can play table tennis.6.sing a song to end the cla.Step 4.Homework 复习课文，给父母讲述小故事。 板书设计: Unit6 happy time I can playfootball
Unit 6 Happy Time
Leon 3 教学目标: 1.知识目标：愉悦的掌握本课的歌曲和句子。
2．能力目标：The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.
5.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.教学重点
Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点
It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具
课件，单词卡片，等等。 教学过程： Step1 Greeting : T: Cla begins.
P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…
1.听录音。提问学生，在这段录音中，你听到了什么？ 2．通过学生的回答与正确的录音相结合，来说唱这些句子。 Eg: I like dogs.Dogs, dogs, dogs.Dogs can run.Run, run, run.3.向学生出示小鸟的图片。
通过上面的说唱例子，来带动学生编写新的小歌曲。
Eg: I like birds.Birds, birds, birds.Birds can fly.Fly, fly, fly.4.依次出示 小孩，小鹿，青蛙，的例子来一一说唱。 Step 4.Homework 给父母说唱小故事。 板书设计: Unit6 happy time I like dogs.
鱼的图片，模仿上面 小猪，
推荐第9篇：人教版英语六年级下册全英教案
Unit 2 last weekend Period 1 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Lead-in 1.Use the cards to learn new words. T:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room .Follow me to read. 2.Use the same teaching method to teach play football,go swimming,go skating.Step 3 Pair work Role play 1.Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.2.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Read new words by themselves. 2.Listen to the tape and read after it. 3.Give enough time to read them . the exercise using the sentences.Step 4 Homework Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection: 1.Some students are good in English cla.2.The pronunciation of two students are not very good.3.Half students can finish exercise book in English cla.
Unit 2 last weekend Period 2 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision 1.Review the words . 2.Review the “ Let’s talk ” of Part A Presentation 1.Open the book “ let ’s learn ”. 2.Teacher show cards of the new words : read a book , saw a film , had a cold , slept , last night , the day before yesterday , last weekend 3.Listen to me carefully 4.Read after me 5.Listen to the tape and read after it 6.Learn the key sentences : What did you do last weekend? I saw a film. Did you like it? Yes, I did.It was great. 7.Translate into Chinese and teacher explain Step 3 Pair work Role play Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Read new words by themselves 2.Listen to the tape and read after it 3.Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework
Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection: 1.Some students are good in English cla.2.The pronunciation of two students are not very good.3.Half students can finish exercise book in English cla.
Unit 2 last weekend Period 3 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”
Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”
2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework
Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:
Unit 2 last weekend Period 4 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”
Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play 3.Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.4.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”
2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework
Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:
Unit 2 last weekend Period 5 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”
Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play Story time Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”
2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework Read Story time Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:
推荐第10篇：pep四年级英语下册全英教案
教 材 总 体 分 析
一、教学内容：
PEP小学英语四年级下册
四年级上册共6个单元、2个复习单元。 Unit 1 Our School
Unit 2 What time is it? Unit 3 Is this your skirt? Unit 4 It’s warm today! Unit 5 How much is it ? Unit 6 At a farm 每单元分“A、B、C”三个部分。每个单元的最开始有一个主情景图，呈现本单元的主要教学内容。接下A和B部分Let’s learn主要学习生单词，Let’s do或Let’s play 是提供活动来练习和巩固这些生单词的。Let’s talk主要学习交际用语，Let’s chant或Group work通过TPR和游戏来巩固所学语言。Read and write、Write and say主要是培养学生的四会能力和阅读能力。C部分主要是适当扩展学生的语言能力，复习和巩固所学语言。而Good to know施以通俗易懂的方式展示中西方文化的差异。教材所蕴含的能力体系： 听：Let’s check 能听懂录音并找出正确答案。 说：Let’s talk 能运用所学日常用语进行交流； 读：四年级上册Read and write 能正确地读出字母的发音以及字母在单词里的发音；写Write and say 能按笔顺正确地书写26个英文字母；做：Let’s do能通过看图片了解并会做相应的动作。
二、教学目标： 听、做
1.能根据教师的语言、动作、事实物等提示听懂所学内容。2.能听懂课堂指令并作出正确的反应。
3.能根据指令做事情，如：指图片、画图、做动作、做手工等 说、唱：
1.能根据录音内容模仿说唱。
2.能听懂、会说12组会话，并能进行简单的交流。3.能唱8首歌曲。
4.能根据图画说出单词或短句。玩、演 1.能用英语做游戏。
2.能表演英文歌曲或歌谣。3.能就所学内容参与角色表演。 认、读：
1.66个单词和听、说、读、写26个字母并且能听、说、读、写。
2.36个单词（包括教室、书包、同学、家具、住宅结构、家庭成员、职业、数字、爱好、食品和饮料、餐具等几个话题），和进行简单的运用
三、教学重点：单词教学
四、教学难点：会话教学
五、教材编写特点：
教材教材的主要编写特点：本套教材的编写思路是以话题为纲，以交际功能和语言结构为主线，逐步引导学生运用英语完成有实际意义的语言任务，即：话题—功能—结构—任务。
1、注重学生语言运用能力的培养，突出语言的实践性和交际性，同时也突出语言的真实性和实用性。本书的语言材料真实地道，活泼有趣，可以发展学生学习英语的自主能力。
2、注重学生自学能力和学习策略的培养，为学生的进一步学习或终身学习奠定基础。
3、注重中外文化的双向交流，使学生通过学习，培养未来跨文化交际所需要的能力。
4、注重学生学习兴趣的培养，以不同方式最大限度的激发学生的学习动机。.全书配有彩色卡通式插图，设计新颖活泼，生动有趣，这样可以激发学生的学习动机和学习。
5、注重融合学科内容，加强学科之间的整合和渗透，让学生通过英语学习来获得其他学科的知识。
6、注重教材的灵活性和可操作性，以满足不同层次的学生的需求。
7、注重教学资料的配套，为学生提供良好的英语学习环境，帮助学生拓展自我发展的空间。每课/课本由主干系统和辅助系统两部分组成。主干系统是由let’s learn, let’s talk, read and write这三部分组成；辅助系统是由main scene, let’s do,let’s play, write and say, story time.各个部分都配有彩图，设计新颖，语言地道，联系学生的实际。
8、注重中小学各阶段的衔接，以保证各学段的顺利过渡，全面提高中小学英语教学的整体质量。
六、应注意的问题：
1、会话教学（Let’s talk / Let’s play）这部分主要采用情境教学法，利用表演和游戏的方式融会话于情境教学中，在情景中运用语言。师生一起在表演中教，在表演中学，在交际活动中用。
2、词汇教学（Let’s learn / Let’s do）这部分采用直观演示法，即利用游戏，使用实物或卡片；并且融词汇于会话教学中；充分发挥TPR活动的优势；详细讲授单词的结构和书写。
3、字母教学（Read and write）四年级上册的字母教学1.可以开展一些模仿竞赛活动教学字母的发音;2.利用卡片，投影，多媒体，描红等手段 指导学生正确地书写字母3.利用游戏促进和巩固对字母的记忆。
4、阅读教学：讲授重点应放在四会单词和句子上。2.引导学生掌握四会句子，着重强调复数结构。3.鼓励学生替换句型中的关键词造新句。要求：听、说、读、写四会单词和句子。
5．其他板块教学（Let’s sing / Let’s chant）。这部分主要采用全身反应教学法，除了用于Warm-up中，也可以不断重复使用于教学过程中。
1、在每节课中渗透2.灵活运用于各个教学环节（引入、复习或放松气氛）3.采取多种表演活动进行学习，story time 要因材施教，根据不同学生的程度进行教学。4.课内与课外结合使用。
七、教学准备：录音机，课件，卡片，磁带。
八、课时安排：每周2课时，每单元4课时。
Unit 1单元教材分析
Teaching Contents: Unit 1 Our School Teaching Aims: 1 Words: playground garden teacher’s office library canteen computer room washroom music room gym TV room 2 Sentences: Where is the canteen?-It’s on the first floor The art room is on the first floor Is this the library? Yes ,it is ./No ,it isn’t .Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four
Period 1 Teaching Aims：
1.To find out whether the students have got the key words or not.2.Find out whether the students have got the main sentences or not.3.Double check whether they have got the rules of the pronunciation of the letter Aa 4.Double whether they have got the way of writing an English sentence.Important points and difficult points: 1.Remind them to remember the rules of writing an English sentence.2.Remind them how to figure out the pronunciation of letter Aa.3.Try to use the main sentences to make their own sentences.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, courseware, pictures.Teaching steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.Are you happy today? If so, let’s sing a song together ‘ Our School’, 2.Revision a.Key words revision: Let the cla use the key words to make some sentences.Have a dictation.b. A competition, different group has different words: Computer school that board Teacher map yes wall Picture this light floor c.Main sentences: Is this „? Is that „? Yes, it is.No, it isn’t.
Exercises: to complete a dialogue A: Welcome to our school! This is the teacher’s office.
That is my claroom B: How many students are there in your cla? A: Forty-five.D.Exercises of pronunciation: a.To judge which words group have the same sound (1) Apple, plate, (2) have, make (3) bag, at (4) hat, face (5)grape, snake (6) cat, plane E.Exercise for multiple choice. ( ) 1.Let’s go and have a ______!
A.see B.meet C.look ( ) 2.Welcome ____ my home! A.in B.to C.at ( ) 3.The art room is on ____second floor.A./ B.a C.the ( ) 4.This _____ my claroom A.are B.am C.is F.If time is enough, the cla may do more exercises in the Active book.4.Homework: a.To copy five stars words four times each. b.To read and recite Let’s talk.Board-writing:
Unit 1 Our School Playground Where is the„? Garden It’s on/in/near„.
Teacher’s office
Library
Canteen
Period 2 Teaching Aims: 1.1 Learn the four words in listing, speaking, reading 2.Learn the new expreions: welcome to, this is, that is, this way, please , your school is beautiful! 3.To develop the students’interest in English.Important points and difficult points: To master these two sentences: This is the teacher’s office.That is my claroom.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, course ware, pictures.Teaching steps: 1.Warming-up a.Greetings & Let’s do.b.Daily report.2.Presentation a.What’s in the claroom? A board, fourteen lights, „.Let the children introduce their claroom, and then tell them two visitors will visit our school, let’s welcome them.b.To play the VCD, and then question the cla: How many students are there in Chenjie’s cla? Does Chenjie have lunch at school? c.Read the dialogue after the tape.d.Read after the teacherRead the text smoothly. f.Practice the dialogue.g.Act the dialogue.h.Game: By using the cards: This is my That is Board-writing:
Unit 1 Our School Welcome to our school.How many students are there in your claroom?
Do you have a library? This way ,please.
Period 3 Teaching aims: 1.Learn these six words and expreions: art room, computer room, washroom, music room, gym, TV room and second in listening, speaking and reading.1.Learn the Part Let’s chant.
Go on to learn the song “ Our School”.
4.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.5.To train the students’ creativity.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids:a tape-recorder pictures cards
Important points and difficult points: 1.To master the six words and expreions: art room, computer room, washroom, music room, gym, TV room.2.To understand the word “ second”.
3.Read in the library, draw in the art room, eat in the canteen, play in the gym.Teaching steps:
1.Warming-up a.Let’s do, A let’s talk, b.Daily greetings and report c.Learn to sing the song “ Our School”.2.Preview The teacher says one sentence like this: I can see many flowers in it.Where is it? The children may answer: It’s in the garden.To give more exercises.3.Presentation a.Let the children act the Part Let’s do, and then ask them: Where do we water the flowers? The cla will answer: In the garden.The teacher goes on to ask: Where do we have computer cla? In the computer room.Where do we draw? In the art room.Where do we wash our hands? In the washroom.Where do we sing? In the music room.Where do we play? In the gym.Where do we watch TV? In the TV room.b.Watch the VCD.c.Let’s chant.
School days, school days.What a lot of fun! Read in the library.Draw in the art room.Eat in the canteen.Play in the gym.School days, school days.What a lot of fun! d.A game: To put the flash cards on the board, and then let the one of them come out to gue out the word in the flash card.Part Let’s play.e.To read the book in Page 7: Where is the art room? It’s on the second floor.The sentence pattern: Where is „? It’s„ Homework Let the students to memorize the words.Recite the whole dialogue.Board-writing:
Unit 1 Our School art room, computer room, wash room, music room, gym, TV room, Where is the art room? It’s on the second floor
Period 4 Teaching aims 1.Learn these main sentences: Is this the library? Is that the TV room? 2.Learn to use the sentence pattern: Is this „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.Is that„? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
To imagine a school in the future, and introduce one’s school in English.3.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.4.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.The sentence patterns: Is this „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
2.Learn to use these two words: this & that Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, courseware, pictures..Teaching steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.How are you? / How are you doing today? b.Daily report: what day is today? What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? 2.Preview to talk about this topic: What’s in our school? Let the children answer in English, they may answer: There are art rooms, computer rooms, music rooms, a gym and many TV rooms.3.Presentation a.To show the headmaster’s photo, and ask the cla: Who is she? Yes, she is our headmaster.Do you want to be a headmaster? Today Wu Yifan is a headmaster is a headmaster.He has a new school.Do you want to have a look? b.Let the cla watch the VCD, while they are watching, ask them some questions: Is this the„? Is that the„?
Let the children answer: Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
c.To practise the sentence patter: Is this „? Is that„? To put the flash cards on the board, and roll over them.d.Let the children listen to the tape.e.Act the dialogue.f.A project.To design a school.g.Do some exercises in the Workbook.Homework Ask the students to memorize the text and listen to the tape after cla and try to imitate the tape.Board-writing:
Unit 1 Our School Is this the library? Is that the art room?
Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
Unit 2单元教材分析
Teaching Contents:
Unit 2 What time is it?
Teaching Aims: 1 .Learn to know how to ask the time and answer the time correctly.2.Be able to describe one’s own usual activities using the language items learned before.3.Learn to know some new instructions like : Time for breakfast.4.Be able to learn and make one’s own schedule for usual activities.5.Learn to make a clock by oneself Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: 1.Learn to master the words and sentences of Read and write in listening, speaking, reading, and writing.2.Learn to know the words and sentences in Let’s learn and Let’s talk.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four
Period 1
Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to know the key words in this period in listening, speaking and reading.2.Learn to know the main sentences: What time is it? It’s„/ It’s time for„.3.Try to know some instructions: Time for breakfast.Important points and difficult points: 1.Try to know and master the key words in this period.2.Learn to know and use the new sentences.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, pictures, tape, tape-recorder etc
Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.b.Play the tape for Ss to listen and review Story time of Unit 1, then let Ss act out the story in groups.2.Preview a.Ask and answer.Where is Zoom? He’s in the canteen.Why? He’s hungry.Why is he hungry? b. What time is it? It’s time for lun Free talk: Let Ss talk about what can tell us the time.E.g.The sun, the moon, the tree etc.3.Presentation a.Show Ss a clock, say and talk.Look! What is this? It’s a clock.Point to 12 and ask: What time is it? It’s 12 o’clock.Are you hungry? Why? It’s time for lunch.b.Practice.Change the time, ask Ss quickly.What time is it? It’s 9 o’clock.It’s time for English cla./P.E cla/ music cla c.Listen and repeat.Let Ss listen to the tape, repeat together.d.Game: (response quickly) Change the time in the clock, ask Ss: What time is it? To see who can answer more quickly.e.Gueing.Show Ss flash cards quickly, ask Ss to gue the words and new expreions.f.Draw and write.To draw some clocks in order to show one’s own schedule.g.Listen and do.h.Exercises in the activity book 4.Homework Master the new phrases.Listen to the tape and imitate the accent.Board-writing:
Unit 2 What time Is It? music cla What time is it?
P.E cla It’s„.English cla It’s time for„.
breakfast lunch
dinner
Period 2
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the new words and expreions.2.Learn to know the main idea of the dialogue.3.Be able to listen and read the dialogue well.4.Be able to use the main sentences skillfully.5.To train the students’ ability of working in groups.6.Education students to be a child hospitality .Difficult points: 1.Try to master the main sentences like: What time is it? It is„.It’s time for„.2.Learn to understand some oral items in this dialogue like: Just a minute; School is over; Let’s run; go home.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, picture, cards, caette, Teaching Steps: 1.Warm up.a.Sing a song.(One Two Three„) b.Greetings.What day is it? What is the date today? c.Listen and do.(A Let’s do) d.Presentation.Show some instructions: Cla is over.School is over.What do you do? Go home.Let’s go to the playground.Let’s watch TV.e.Free talk. Show Ss a chart.Let them look and think carefully and try to say some sentences about the picture.Ask them some questions.f.Watch and listen. Let Ss watch VCD, listen carefully, try to understand the main idea of the dialogue.Explain any difficulties to help them.g.Make sentences using the following sentence drill.It’s time for„Listen and repeat, pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.h.Group work.Read the dialogue aloud in groups.i. Act out .Ask some groups to act out it.Or the teacher can act out John.j. Do exercise on the activity book.2.Aignment.a.Listen and read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercises.3.Homework Listen to the tape and read the dialogue.Make a new dialogue.Board-writing:
Unit 2 What Time Is It? over School is over.Now What time is it now? Kid Go home , kids.
Just a minute.Let’s run.
Period 3
Teaching Aims: 1 Listen, speak and read the key expreion.2.Understand the main sentence and try to use it skillfully.3.To train the students’ ability of working in groups.4.Education students to be a child hospitality .Difficult points: omputer, Caette, Caette recorder, flash cards, A teaching clock.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: A tape-recorder a schoolbag with some books in it Teaching Steps: 1.Warm up.a.Play a game.Try to practice the numbers.Write down some math problems like: 16+39-35 =? Ss quickly give me the answers orally.b.Greetings.2.Preview.a.Let’s chant.b.Ask and answer.3.Presentation.Let’s learn a.Play a game.( Gueing the time) What time is it? It’s time for„ It’s time to„
b.Make types of clock using hands.Ask: What time is it? It’s 4:35.School is over.Where do you go? We go home.c.Present new sentence: It’s time to go home.It’s time to go to school.d.Listen and do.Give Ss some orders, let Ss do actions.e.Listen and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.f.Drills.Drill the sentence drill: It’s time to„ using “A Let’s do”.g.Draw and say.Draw their own time table and talk about what they do in the different time.For example: It’s 6 o’clock.It’s time to get up.4.Aignment a.Finish the exercise on the activity book.b.Read the chant aloud.c.Copy down the words expreions Board-writing:
Unit 2 What Time Is It? get up go to school go home go to bed It’s time to„.
Period 4
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the key words in four skills.2.Be able to read the dialogue correctly.Be able to read and write the words and sentences well.Difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape-recorder some cards Teaching Steps: 1.Warm –up a.Chant together with actions.b.Daily report.What day is today? What is the date today? It’s March,...What’s the weather like today? 2.Preview.a.Using the schedule, ask and answer.Say: Tick, tock, tick, tock, says the clock.It’s 7:00.Answer: It’s time for breakfast.b.Play a game: Show Ss the time, choose any one to say like this: It’s„ It’s time for„.3.Presentation: Group competition: Divide Ss into four groups, try to say the time quickly.a.Listen to the tape.Let the Ss understand the contents.b.Give Ss some questions for the dialogue, ask them to answer randomly.c. Listen and repeat.d.Ask some pairs to act out.e.Play a game. Ss show their own schedule, they play the game in pairs.A: Tick, tock, tick, tock, says the clock.It’s 12 o’clock.B: It’s time for lunch.f.Write the words and the main sentences by themselves.4.Consolidation and extension a.Finish the exercise on the activity book about B Read and write.b.Copy down the words and the main sentences one line each.c.Make a clock by themselves.Board-writing:
Unit 2 What time is it? 8:30 It’s time for English cla.9:45 math cla 3:20 Chinese cla 4:15 music cla 5:00 P.E.cla
Unit 3单元教材分析
Teaching Contents:
Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to describe the size of the clothes, the colour of the clothes.2.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.3.Learn to know and understand the sentences of Let’s learn & Let’s talk.4.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do & Let’s chant.5.Learn to understand the story time and Good to know.6.Cultivate them to co-operate with each other, encourage them to create.Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four
Period 1
Teaching Aims: 1.1.Further understand the colors in English.2.Learn to say the keywords about the clothes.3.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do with some actions.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up: a.Greetings: How are you? How was your weekend? b.B.Date & weather.What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision c.The teacher asks the cla: What’s your favourite colour? What colour do you like best? d.A game: Gue what colour of the crayons in Mi Guo’s hands? 3.Presentation & consolidation a.The teacher will say: What is Mi Guo wearing today? I’m wearing a shirt today.What are you wearing today? You are wearing school uniforms today.I’m wearing „ .
b.The teacher will show the cards to the cla one by one: jacket, sweater, skirt, dre, shirt, T-shirt.c.Try to use the new words to make some sentences such as: I like the „ I like the „ with the „ .
d.A game: let them further understand the new words, what word is miing? Or what’s in my hand? e.Listen to the tape, and get the general idea of the sentences.Especially the verbs: put on, hang up, take off, put away, fold & wash.Help them to master these phrases.They can make their own sentences with the verb phrases.f.Group work: Watch the VCD first, and then practise the sentences with their groups and with some actions.g.Free talk: what color is your T-shirt? What color is your jacket? 3.Homework: a.To copy the new words one line for each To read Let’s do aloud..Board-writing:
Unit 3 Is this your skirt? skirt Put on „ .shirt Take off „ .T-shirt Hang up „ .jacket Fold up „ .Sweater Wash „ .dre Put away„
Period 2
Teaching Aims: 1.1.Learn to master the four-skilled words about the colours.2.Learn to master the way to write the key words and the sentences.3.Try to understand the meaning of the dialogue.4.Learn to read the chant.5.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.Learn to master the right way to write the key words and the sentences.2.Try to read the first part of the chant.3.Try to make an own dialogue with the sentences they have learnt.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up.Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Date & weather: What’s the date?
What’s the weather like outside?
c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.2.Revision a.The teacher asks: What are you wearing today? I’m wearing „ .
b.Read the chant of Page 31.3.Presentation & consolidation.a.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What colour is your shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? b.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: How many colours can you see? How many animals can you see? Is this T-shirt the rabbits’?
What colour is the rabbit’s T-shirt? What colour is the dog’s T-shirt? What about the cat’s?
c.Listen to the tape, read after it.d.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.e.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.f.To use the sentence structures: ‘Is this your „?’ To make more different sentences.4.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each. b.Copy down the sentences two-line each Board-writing:
Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? red Is this your „? blue No, it isn’t.yellow No, it’s not.Green White
Period 3
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to master the main words about clothes.2.Learn to ask and answer about the clothes colour in plural form.3.Try to understand the meaning of the chant.4.Learn to read the chant.5.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.6.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.Try to read the chant, get to know the words like socks, shoes, pants, shorts, with, are, together.2.Ask and answer about the colours of clothes in plural form.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 3.Warm-up.A Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Date & weather: What’s the date?
What’s the weather like outside?
c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.Step 2.Presentation .Use flash cards to teach the main words: jeans, shorts, socks, shoes and pants.2.Use pictures or real objects to ask: what colour are the „? They are„.
Step 3.Presentation & consolidation.b.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What colour is your shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? What colour are your shoes/pants/„?
b.Let the cla figure out “are” and “is”.“are” is used in a plural form.“is” is used in a singular form.a.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: How many colours can you see? How many animals can you see? Is this T-shirt the rabbits’?
What colour is the rabbit’s T-shirt? What colour is the dog’s T-shirt? What about the cat’s?
b.Listen to the tape, read after it.c.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.d.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.e.To use ‘what colour are the„? They are„.’ To make more different sentences.See which students can do more.5.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each.c.Copy down the sentences two-line each.d.Board-writing:
Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? Where are my shoes\\ shorts\\ pants\\ socks\\jeans? They are „„Make friends.Play computer games.
Period 4
Teaching Aims: 1.1.Learn to master the five key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.2.Learn to know how to describe the clothes.3.Learn to know how to write the main sentences.4.Learn to understand the dialogue.
5.When they see the objects, they can recognize and read them and do the action about them.Important points and difficult points: 1.The sentences written should be concerned.Pay attention to their first letter of a sentence and the full stop.2.Try to master or memorize the key words in the cla.Otherwise they will feel too much preure on them.3.Try to act out the dialogue.Master the way to ask the colours.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up Greetings: How are you feeling today? What’s the date? What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision: a.Let them say the names of the clothes.First: pants, shorts, jeans, shoes, socks, T-shirt, shirt, skirt, jacket and dre Try to describe their own clothes: This is my T-shirt.My T-shirt is blue.3.Presentation & consolidation a.Watch the VCD; let them get the general idea of the dialogue.Ask them what words they have heard and what colour they are.b.The teacher will show a chart on the board and then ask: (1).What time is it? (2) What clothes does Zip have for her birthday party? (3) What colour is the dre? (4) Which one is pretty? c.Let them ask some questions about the chart.They can imagine or ask.d.A game.Use the letters to make words of clothes.a e i o u s h r d j t p k n l c e.Let the children take out their exercises book and try to make some sentences: What colour is it? It’s white.f.Act out the dialogue.g.Written exercise for phonetics: cake apple hat face bag have we desk egg pen he she have snake three me cat apple make grape 4.Homework a.Copy down the main new words one line each.b.To read the dialogue aloud.Board-writing:
Unit 3 Is this your skirt?
Skirt What colour is it? Shirt It’s white.
Jacket I have a new dre for my birthday dre party.T-shirt This red T-shirt is pretty
Unit 4单元教材分析
Teaching Contents:
Unit4 It’s warm today
Teaching Aims: 1. Learn to describe the weather.2.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.3.Learn to know and understand the sentences of Let’s learn, Read and write & Let’s talk.
4.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do & Let’s chant.5.Learn to understand the story time and Good to know.Teaching Points: 1. Try to say the weathers.2.The plural forms and the singular forms of the clothes .3.Try to say the size of the clothes in English.4.Try to expre and use the sentences:what’s the weather like„? It’ „.
5.Try to write the key words properly.Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four
Period 1
Teaching Aims: 1.To act quickly after listening to the T.2.Master the sentences: This is my home.You can see a bedroom...3.New words: study bathroom bedroom living room kitchen Important points and difficult points: 1.Learn to understand the key words in listening, speaking and reading.2.Try to understand the word, and use them into sentences.Learn to understand the sentences of What’s the weather like in„? It’s „ .
Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: A tape-recorder，an English book, a Chinese book, a storybook, a notebook and a math book.Teaching Steps: 2.Warm-up: b.Greetings: How are you? c.B.Date ,day& weather.What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? What day is it today? 2.Revision d.The teacher asks the cla: What’s your favourite clothes? What colour is your„?
e.A game: Gue what colour of the clothes? 3.Presentation & consolidation The teacher will say: What’s weather like today? It’s„. h.The teacher will show the cards to the cla one by one: cool, cold, hot, warm.i.Try to use the new words to make some sentences such as: What’s the weather like„? It’s „
j.A game: let them further understand the new words, what word is miing? Or what’s in my hand?
k.Listen to the tape, and get the general idea of the sentences.l.Group work: Watch the VCD first, and then practise the sentences with their group.m.Free talk: What’s the weather like today? It’s„ .4.Homework: a.To copy the new words one line for each b.Ready for a weather report.Board-writing:
Unit 4 It’s warm today! weather, cool, cold, hot, warm.What’s the weather like in„?
It’s „ .
Period 2
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s talk.2.Learn to expre the weather.3.Learn to know the “Can I wear„?” ask and answer.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings: How are you? Fine, thank you.b.Day,Date & weather: What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision: a.To review the weather report: This is the weather report„.It’s „.And so on.
b.To review the main words about weather Further understand the pronunciation of the main words.Especially the words: weather, wear, today, can’t, put on.
3.Presentation & consolidation: a.The teacher will point to a picture and say: Is it cool today? They will answer: Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
b.Let the cla practise in pairs: Is it hot „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
c.The teacher points to the picture and asks: what’s the weather like„? It’s „.Can I wear„? Yes, you can./ No, you can’t.Then the teacher asks the questions one by one till all the students understand.d.Let the cla make sentences with the structure: It’„today.Can I wear„?
Yes, you can./ No, you can’t.
e.To watch the VCD, then the teacher will ask some questions according to the dialogue.f.To practise the dialogue in groups/pairs, then act out the dialogue.4.Homework: a.To copy the main words each one line.b.To read the dialogue aloud.Board-writing:
Unit 4 It’s warm today!
Can I wear „ ?
Yes, you can./ No, you can’t It’s warm/hot/cool/cold today.
Period 3
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to master the four-skilled words about the weather.2.Learn to master the way to write the key words and the sentences.3.Try to understand the meaning of the dialogue.4.Learn to read the chant.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 4.Warm-up.Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Day,date & weather: What’s the date?
What’s the weather like outside? It’s„.c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.2.Revision a.The teacher asks: What are you wearing today? I’m wearing „ .
b.Read the chant of Page 47.3.Presentation & consolidation.e.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What’s the weather like will you wear shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? c.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: What’s the weather like in„?
Can I wear„?
d.Listen to the tape, read after it.e.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.f.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.g.To use the sentence structures: Put on„ / Take off„ To make more different sentences.6.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each. b.Copy down the sentences two-line each.Board-writing:
Unit 4 It’s warm today! hot warm cool cold Put on„ / Take off„
Period 4
Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking and reading.2.Learn to figure out the words : rainy, windy, sunny, cloudy, snowy.3.Try to describe the weather: Here’s the world weather.It’s„ in„.
Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: VCD, computer, a chart, caette and the recorder, wall pictures, flash cards.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up.a.Greetings: Ask some of them to greet or ask some questions.b.Date & weather report.c.A song 2.Revision 3.Presentation & consolidation a.The teacher will say: what’s the weather like in„? It’s „. b.Practise the sentences in pairs.c.Let them make the sentences with “Here’s the world weather.It’s „ in„.”
d.Watch the VCD; let them get the general idea of the dialogue.e.Ask and Answer: What’s the weather like in„? It’s„.
f.Group work: Practise the dialogue in groups g.Make a weather report in the world.4.Homework a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Copy the main words and sentences two times each.Board-writing:
Unit 4 rainy windy sunny cloudy snowy Here’s the world weather.It’s „ in„.
Unit 5单元教材分析
Teaching Contents:
Unit 5 How much is it ?
Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to describe the size of the shoes and the clothes, talk about the price, colour and style.( It’s expensive/ colourful.) 2.Be able to ask the price and make some suggestions.3.Try to do actions according to the commands
Teaching Points: Words and sentences Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards..Teaching Times: Four
Period 1
Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read the words: colourful, pretty, cheap, and expensive.2.Be able to talk about the colours, price and style: It’s expensive/ colourful/ pretty/ cheap.3.Be able to chant the rhyme well.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm –up.a.Free talk Ask some questions like the following: T: What’s the weather like today? Ss: It’s cloudy and warm. T: Can you wear your sweater? Ss: No, I can’t.b.Let’s chant.Mmm, It’s warm today.2.Preview.Let’s chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue„.Try to present the new words in a natural way.3.Presentation.Let’s learn.(1) Draw different clothes with nice colors on the blackboard.Ask: What’s this? It’s a dre/ jacket/skirt.Look at this skirt.What colour is it? Is it pretty? /colourful? How much is? Is it expensive/cheap/big/long/small/short? Help the Ss to answer them.Present the new words with the help of the real objects.(2) Show them the flash cards, to listen and repeat the new words: colourful, pretty, cheap, and expensive.(3) Play a game.a.I say cheap, Ss say expensive, or on the opposite.b.Cheap or expensive? Tell Ss that more than 80 is expensive, le than 79 is cheap.Put the price on the bag, pen, pencil, books, clothes, Ss see the price, then say It’s cheap/expensive.To see who can see the fastest.(4) Listen and repeat. Let Ss listen to tape recorder, repeat aloud. Then help Ss to say these following sentences: Look at that „ It’s„ I want to buy it.It’s„yuan.(5) Extension.Use the real objects to show Ss a dialogue like this: A: Can I help you? B: Yes, I ‘d like a pen.A: Look at that pen.Is it nice? B; Yes, it’s pretty.I like it How much is it? A: It’s 2 yuan. B: Oh, it’s cheap.I want buy it. A: Here you are. Get Ss to make more dialogues using the words and expreions.(5) Listen and chant in groups.4.Homework.a.Copy the key words.b. Listen and chant together.Board-writing:
Unit 5 How much is it? colourful pretty cheap expensive. It’s „ It’s.„Yuan.I want to buy it.
Period 2
Teaching Aims: 3.Be able to listen, speak, read the new words well: sixty seventy ninety-nine hundred aistant help how much that’s= that is 4.Be able to talk about the colours, price and style: That’s expensive/ colourful / pretty /cheap.How much is it? It’s „yuan.5..Be able to use the language skillfully.Important points and difficult points: 1.Listen, speak, read the key words well.2.Be able to communicate with the useful language points: Can I help you? How much is this dre/ shirt/jacket? Difficulty words: expensive pretty colourful ninety-nine Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 5.Warm –up.a.Sing a song.My clothes. b.Listen and chant with the tape. c.Listen and do.(For Unit 5) 6.Preview. Ply the tape for Ss to listen to the song of Unit 5: The Coat in the Window.7.Presentation.Let’s talk (1) Make a dialogue with an individual student.T: Hello, How much is your shirt? S.It’s thirty yuan.T: Is it expensive? S: No, but it’s pretty.(2) Look, listen and imitate.a.Look at the picture.Ask some questions.Who can you see? What does Amy want to buy? How much is it? Is it cheap? b.Watch VCD tape.Try to understand the dialogue.c.Listen to the dialogue, repeat with the tape.d.Play a game; Higher or lower? Student holds a pen up: The others try to gue the price.S1: How much is this pen? S2: It’s two yuan.S1: Higher! Higher! S3: It’s Four yuan.S1: Lower! Lower! S4: It’s three yuan.S1: Yes.(3) Group talk.Try to ask the price of their own clothes or the stationeries.Then make a survey.(4) Practice the dialogue in the real situation.(5) Act out their dialogues.8.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.Board-writing:
Unit 5 How much is it? Aistant: Can I help you? Ninety-nine Customer: Yes, I want „ sixty seventy That’s expensive/ cheap.It’s too „
Period 3
Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read the dialogue well.2.Be able to talk about the size, price and style of the things you want to buy.3.Group work: To make a survey.Ask the prices of your friends’ clothes.Important points and difficult points: 1.Listen, speak, read the key words well.2.Be able to communicate with the useful expreions.3.Try to make a dialogue about the shopping by themselves.4.Difficult sentences: How about this pair? Are they all right? Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.We’ll take them.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 9.Warm –up.a.Let’s do.(Listen and do actions) b.Greetings and everyday English.10.Preview. Play the tape for Ss to listen to the song of Unit 5: The Coat in the Window.11.Presentation.Let’s talk (1) Make a dialogue with an individual student.T: Hello, Are you wearing a pair of sandals? S.No, I’m wearing a pair of sneakers.T: Look at my sandals.They are old.I want to buy a new pair.Let’s go shopping together.S: Good idea.(2) Look, listen and imitate.a.Look at the picture.Ask some questions.b. Watch VCD tape.Try to understand the dialogue.c.Explain the difficulties: What size? Size 5.Are they all right? We’ll take them.d.Listen to the dialogue, repeat with the tape.e.Group talk.Make a survey. To know the size.Ask; What size do you wear? I wear size 37. How much are your sandals/ sneakers/ slippers? f.Practice the dialogue in groups.g.Act out the dialogue.
h.Play a game.Gue the size of what they wear.What size do you wear? Gue.Size 5.Smaller.Size 4.i.If time permits, let Ss go to buy the things they have in groups.12.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.Board-writing:
Unit 5 How much is it? A pair of sneakers for my son.
What size? How about this pair? How much are they?
We’ll take them.
Period 4
Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read and write the key words well: apple, pear, orange, banana, and watermelon.2.Be able to say and write the main sentences: How much are they? They’re three Yuan.3..Be able to use the language skillfully.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 13.Warm –up.a.Let’s do. b.Greetings and daily report.14.Preview.a.Make a survey: Ask Ss to think of what size of shoes and clothes their family members wear.Ask them some questions. 3.Presentation.a.Show Ss the chart let them look at it carefully.Ask them questions.What does Zoom want to buy? What fruits do you know? Does Zoom want any lemons? How many apples does Zoom want? b.Ask the Ss to say something about the picture.c.Show them the cards, help Ss say: one apple, five apples, ten pears, ten oranges, and two big watermelons.d.Play a game: Show them pictures, let Ss quickly say the plural forms of the words: two apples, three bananas„ e.Listen and watch the dialogue.a) Read and practice the dialogue.g.Act out the dialogue with headdrees.h.Let Ss make their own dialogue in groups.i.Do the exercises on the activity book.15.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.c.Copy the key sentences and words one line each.Board-writing:
Unit 5 How much is it? A fruit shop apples pears Pictures oranges bananas
Watermelons How much are they? They’re three Yuan.
Unit6单元教材分析
Teaching Contents:
Unit 6 At a farm
Teaching Aims: 1. Can listen, read, and say the main words of let’s learn.2.Can understand the commands and give correct responses.3.Can understand the main sentences and can use them in real life.Know some English proverbs.Teaching Points: Words and sentences Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening
Teahing Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.
Teaching Times: Four
Period 1
Teaching Aims: 2.Can listen, read, and say the main words of let’s learn.3.Can understand the commands and give correct responses.Important points and difficult points: 1.The names of the animals at a farm.2.The difference in the pronunciation of ‘horse’ and ‘house’; 3.The difference of ‘how many’ and ‘how much’ Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm-up 1.Daily English practice.What’s the weather like today? Is it warm? Oh, what a lovely day! Let’s go to the farm! Step 2.Preview 1.Let’s do.Listen to the tape, t do actions to show the meaning of the phrases.Students listen and do actions after the teacher.2.T draws some farm animals on the blackboard.Use the fast way or slow way of drawing and ask the students: Are they„? Step 3 presentation Let’s learn 1.T shows some pictures of farm animals: look at these animals.Where do they live? They live on the farm.2.Show the main poster of this unit: this is a farm.There are many animals at the farm.Look, horses, hens, sheep, cows, goats and lambs.T repeats the names of the farm animals; students can make some sounds of that kind of animal.3.T uses the word cards to teach the farm animals.a.T gives out the sound of animal with actions; students follow and say the words.b.Students practice in pairs in the same way.c.Ss work in pair.Draw and gue.4.T: what do you see in the picture? How many horses / hens /sheep /sows /goats /lambs do you see? Where are the hoses /hens /sheep / cows /goats / lambs? What are those? / What are they? 5.Practice let\'s do.6.Ss ask and answer in pairs with the student’s card.What are they? They are„.Board-writing:
Unit 6 At a farm What are they? They are„.Feed„ Sheep-sheep Ride„ Horse-horses Milk„ Hen-hens Shear...Cow-cows Hold„ Goat-goats
Period 2
Teaching Aims: 1.Can understand the main sentences and can use them in real life.2.Know some English proverbs.3.can listen, say, read, and write the four skill words.4.can understand the dialogue and can act it out.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.warm –up 1.learn the song of this unit: Mary has a little lamb 2.Gueing game: T or Ss make the sounds of animals.The others gue what animals are they.Step 2.revision 1.use picture cards to review the words about farm animals.2.let’s play T shows some parts of the picture, students gue what animals it is.See who can say out the words quickly.Then his group can get one point.3.review let’s do with actions.Step 3.presentation 1.Present the contents of A let’s talk.Ss watch the VCD about the dialogue and then answer the teacher’s questions: a.How many people are there in the dialogue? b.Who are they? c.Where are they? Are they at school? d.What can they see at the farm? e.How many cows are there at the farm? Step 4 practice 1.Listen to the dialogue and repeat after it.2.practice the dialogue in groups.3.Some groups act out the dialogue.Homework: reside the dialogue Board-writing:
Unit 6 At a farm Are they„? Yes, they are./No, they aren’t.
How many„do you have?
Period 3
Teaching Aims: 1.Can listen, say, and read the main words.2.Can read the new words after the tape.3.Can say the chant.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm –up/revision 1.Use pictures cards to review the words of farm animals.Practice in sentences: what are these/those? They are„.Are they„.? Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.2.Use picture cards and word cards to teach the new words: tomato-tomatoes, potato-potatoes, cucumber-cucumbers, an onion- onions, carrot- carrots.3.Use real objects to say: look at the „ they are„.Or: The tomatoes are red.They are juicy.The potatoes are brown.They are tasty.The carrots are orange.They are yummy.The cucumbers are green.They are tender.The onions are white.They are smelly.4.Let’s chant.Ss listen to the tape, and repeat after it.Learn the chant by listening and repeating.T can explain some new words to them.Step 3 Homework 1.Copy the new words.2.Reside the chant.Board-writing:
Unit 6 At a farm Tomato- tomatoes, juicy and red.Cucumber-cucumbers tender and green.Potato- potatoes, tasty and brown.Onion-onions, smelly and white.carrot-carrots, Yummy and orange.
Period 4
Teaching Aims: 1.Can listen, say, read and write the words and sentences in this part.2.Can read the dialogue with the help of teacher and tape.3. Can listen, say and read the main sentences: What are these/ those? Are these/ those„? And can answer them.4.Can read the dialogue with the help of the teacher and tape.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm- up 1.Review the words of farm animals and vegetables with the help of pictures.2.Review the main sentence patterns.3.Review the dialogues and chants of Part A and B.Step 2 presentation 1.Listen to the tape to learn the dialogue.2.Repeat after the tape.3.Practice spelling the words and sentences.Step 3 practice 1.Have a spelling game to help them to memorize the four skilled words and sentences and tell them how to write them in the same way.2.Ss practice in pair to spell the words.Step 3 Homework Copy the dialogue and the four skilled words and sentences.Board-writing:
Unit 6 At a farm Are these„?
Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.
What are these/ those?
They are„.
第11篇：Module14全英教案
Module1 The Great Wall
1、Teaching preparing:
Students book：Module1Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task: A．basic object:
Key words：
thousand postcard more kilometer
Key sentences: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?
B .
To learn “thousand
kilometer
million ” C．Review: The using way of the verb „be‟ 2．
Talking about some famous places.
3、Teaching point: words： thousand
kilometer
million postcard
more
4、Teaching difficulty:
kilometer
thousand
million
“Tell me more about the Great Wall.“It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.”
5、Task design: words： postcard
more
thousand
kilometer
million
Sentences: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?”
“It‟s about six thousand seven hundred kilometers.”的句型。 B. The task:
1：AB
Unit1
exercise3 2：AB
Unit2
exercise
1、
2、
4、5
6、Teaching things Photo radio picture wordcards 第一课时:
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss
(2) Competition: List the places the visited as many as poible .
2、Leading : （1）A.watch TV T: What’s this place?
S: ( teacher writes the main structure on board as modal for other students ) It’s a picture of … B.Game : Tell me more T: It’s an animal.S1: Tell me more
T: It has long nose.
S1: It’s an elephant.
The more “Tell me more”, the le will the score be given.
3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.Where are they? c.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: postcard
more
thousand
kilometer
million b.The main sentences structure: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?” (6) students practice to make sentences with the key points. Game：Paing wordcards
4、Drilling and Counselling （1）Finish the exercise one (2) Pairwork
5、Teaching handwriting: “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about ……”
三.课后反思:
这堂课主要讲了各个国家的一些名胜古迹,通过让孩子描述图片的内容来掌握所学的句型.锻炼他们的口头表达能力,再让他们自己带一些图片,同桌之间相互对图片进行描述,加深对所学知识的记忆.单词的掌握还欠缺一点.
第二课时
Step1.Tell students a joke and give them a riddle to fun.
Step2.Review the words: postcard
more
thousand
kilometer
million
Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles.
Step4.Teacher explain the using way of “million” “thousand”: teacher give numbers, students tells “~ thousand” or “~ million”.
6,000,000
34,000
12,000,000
Step5.Homework: a.word dictation b.recite paragraph one c.Students make role play about unit one.
第三课时
Step1.a.Student make role play.
b.Give words dictation.
c.Open Activity Book.
Step2.Do exercise 1.a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.Students read the questions.c.Teacher gives help, students finish the question.
Step3.Do exercise 2.Listen, ask and answer.
a.Play the tape a second time, pauses it after each second . T: What are they? S: They are cars, trees.….b.Work in pairs, ask and answer.
Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets,students fill the blank
第2单元教案 New York is in the east of America.
1Teaching preparing: Student‟s book：Module1Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task: A．Basic objects: Key words：Mexico
Canada Key sentences: “It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”
“Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?” B．Review: The using way of verb „be‟
2．Making student know about famous places.Talking about some basic facts of a country or a place，and learn to use direction words：It‟s in the north / south / west / east of
3、Teaching point: words：
Mexico
Canada
San Francisco
New York
4、Teaching difficulty: How to pronounce “Mexico” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.”
5、Task design Learning task: Review words：thousand
kilometer postcard
more
million
To learn vocabulary：San Francisco
New York Mexico
Canada
Learning “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.”
“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…” “It‟s about six thousand seven hundred kilometers.”
6、Teaching things
Radio
wordcards
photo
picture
第四课时
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss (2) Pointing game: Teacher gives students four cards “north / south / west / east”, let students put them around the claroom.T: North.S: Students point to the north
2、（Leading ） （1）A.Watch PPT T: What‟s this place? S: It‟s a picture of America.Students learn to read Mexico
Canada
San Francisco
New York B.a.Game : Pointing game ( Students open the book, look at activity 1 ) T: Mexico.S: Students point to the south of the map.c.Listen to the tape, and point to the places on the map.C.Lead in
1) Student list Chinese famous cities, teacher write them on the black board.
2) Teacher write the main structure on the board: “Tell me more about the …...” “Where is it?”
“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”
“How long / big is it?”
3) Students practice with partner
3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.
4、（Drilling and Counselling） Learn the chant: a.What can you see? b.What can you see on the flag?
Teacher introduce history of American flag.c.Students listen to the tape.e.Students repeat 5．Teacher‟s handwriting： “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about ……”
“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”
三.课后反思
第五课时
Step1 Warm up: Do the chant “America”
Play a game：“What am I?”
Rules: Students can do 1~2 actions.1 action got a star, 2 actions got 2 stars.
The le actions , the more stars will be given.
Step2 Do activity 3.a.Listen to the tape.b.Listen again, students claps hands, they can clap harder when hear the streed words.c.Students repeat
Step3 Do activity book Activity 1 a.T: what can you see?
S: I saw….
b.Ss read the words after teacher.c.Play the tape, students write the answer.Activity 2 a.Ss read the places with teacher‟s help.b.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help.
Step4 Homework 1.Do exercise 3 2.words dictation.
课后反思：
课本中出现了东南西北方位词,虽然不是重点,但还是应该拿出来给孩子们复习复习.通过对这个模块的一个小测验,发现孩子们对基本知识的掌握不够扎实.
《英语》六年级第七册第2模块
第1单元教案 Chinatown in America
1Teaching preparing
Students‟ book：Module2 Unit 1 Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task 2．Basic task Key words：mi
sometimes
restaurant
really Key sentences“There‟s a Chinatown in New York!” “There are lots of Chinese shops and restaurants there”.B know about “lots of”
C．Review:
The using way of the verb „There be‟ 2．To describe places
3、Teaching point:
dancing
words：
sometimes
restaurant
really
4 Teaching difficulty How to pronounce words „sometimes
restaurant‟ To learn the structure “There be”
5、Task design A.Learning task Key words： mi
sometimes
restaurant
really
dancing
Key structure: “There‟s a Chinatown in New York!”
“There are lots of Chinese shops and restaurants there”.B.:Task 1：AB Unit1 exercise3
2：AB Unit 2 exercise
1、
2、
4、5
3: Play a game: Students should prepare a piece of paper
第一课时
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss
(a.) Student talk about there weekend: T: I bought some fruits, can you gue What did I buy? S：Did you buy…..2 Leading （1）A.Teacher show a peach(card) on the blackboard, “What can you see?” S: A peach.Teacher help the students say: There is a peach.(b.) Students make sentences with “ There is a …..”
(c.) Teacher show two peaches and teach “ There are … (n+s/es)” (d.) Students make sentences with “ There are … (n+s/es)” Watch POWERPOINT T: What‟s this place?
S: ( teacher writes the main structure on board as modal for other students ) There is/are ….in/on….B.Game : The Six boxes
a.Students draw six big boxes on a piece of paper.b.Tell them to number the boxes „1—6‟ c.Teacher ells what to draw in the boxes: In box 1 there is a pen.In box 2 there are two erasers.In box 3 there is an apple.In box…… C.Lead in
1)T: I describe a place, you gue.if you don‟t know, you ask “ tell me more!” students gue out it‟s Chinatown, teacher Show PPT about Chinatown.
2) Ask students to describe with sentence structure “There be” given on the blackboard.
3、Presentation (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures c.Who are they? d.Where are they? c.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: mi
sometimes
restaurant
really
dancing
b.“ There is a …..”
“ There are … (n+s/es)”
(6) students practice to make sentences with the key points. Game：paing wordcards
make sentences
4、Drilling and Counselling （1）Finishing activity book exercise 3. (2) Students help each other.
5、(Task-fulfilling) Gueing game：”Where do you go on weekend?” 6．Teachers handwriting:
There
is
a
( n )
There
are
( ns/es)
第二课时
Step1.Tell students a joke and give them a riddle to fun.
Step2.Review the words: mi
sometimes
restaurant
really
dancing
Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles
Step4.Game a.Revise „north‟ „south‟ „west‟ „east‟ with the students.b.Tell the students to draw a big circle on a piece of paper.( tell them that the circle is an island and that you are going to describe the contents the island and and they have to draw the objects in the correct places.c.T: (draw a large island on your paper) In the north there is a river.In the south there are two mountains.In the west there are some trees.In the east there is a house.
Step5.Homework: d.word dictation e.recite paragraph one f.Students make role play about unit one.
Step6.课后反思
第三课时
Step1.a.Student make role play.
b.Give words dictation.
c.Open Activity Book.
Step2.Do exercise 1.a.Play the recording again, then encourage them to tell the important things in the story.b.For each question invite a student to come to the blackboard and write the sentence.
Step3.Do exercise 4.Look at the pictures.Write sentences.
a.students draw things that they know how to say in English and be similar to the ones in the book.b.Collect all the pictures from the cla.c.Students A and B, give A a picture , A describe the picture and B draw it .d.Show the picture, if student B draws the same object, he/she gets a point.
Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets,students fill the blank
第2单元教案
Postcards from China
Teaching preparing 1 .Teaching task Students book：Module2Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3 Teaching objects 2．
A．Basic task Key words：
bicycle mountain lake square Key sentences: “There are lots of bicycles in China” “There is a very famous river” B．Review:
The using way of the verb „There be‟
2．Use the structure to introduce famous places
For example: learn to use „There be‟
to describe some basic facts of a country or a place
3、Teaching point: Key words： bicycle mountain lake square
4、Teaching difficulty: How to pronounce‟ square.‟ How to use „there be‟
5、Task design: Learning task: Review words： mi
sometimes
restaurant
really
dancing
To learn words： bicycle
mountain
lake square
To learn “There are lots of bicycles in China” “There is a very famous river”
6、Teaching things: radio photo wordcards picture 7．课后反思
第二课时
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss (2) Chant” America”
(3) Play a game to review the structure.
2、Leading : （1）A.Watch PPT T: What‟s this place?
S: It‟s a picture of the Changjiang River .
The Tian‟anmen Square .
The West Lake .
The Huangshan Mountain
The Great Wall.a.Students learn to read them.b.Student describe them with “There is/are…..” B.Lead in
a.) Listen to the tape, and number the places.b.) Students repeat after the tape sentence by sentence.c.) Students try to recite the paragraph with teacher‟s help, the students who have tried will get a sticker. 3) Students practice with partner 3 Presentation: (1)Ss do exercise 2 Now point and say (2)Ss do exercise 3 Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…
4、Drilling and Counselling Learn the song: “There‟s a Great Wall in China” a.Students listen to the tape.b.Students repeat
三.课后反思:
第五课时
Step1 Warm up:
Sing the song: “There‟s a Great Wall in China”
Play a game：“Memory”
Rules: a.Students are divided into boys group and girls group.b.Give them limited time to memory the pictures, then they close the book.c.Students describe the objects in their memory, the more correct object they give, the more scores they will gain.
Step2 Do activity book Activity 1 Listen and number.
a.T: what can you see?
S: I can see there is/are…( Students try to describe the pictures) b.Teacher describe the pictures, students number.
Step3
Activity 4 Look and complete the postcard.c.Ss draw the places with teacher‟s describing.d.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help.
Step4 Homework 1 Do exercise 3 2 words dictation.
课后反思：
由于学生个体差异的不同,课堂上的内容对有些孩子比较容易,而对个别学生来说有很难,甚至不能听懂.但我是不会让一个孩子落后的.六年级的内容也增加了,教学内容就要做合理的调整和补充,同时根据学生的心理特点,有区别有重点的调整才行.《英语》六年级第七册第3模块
第1单元教案 Collecting stamp is my hobby
Teaching preparing: 1. Students book：Module3Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3 Teaching task: 2． Knowledge : A．Basic task: Key words：another collect
stamp
hobby
men
Key sentences: “I‟ve got lots of stamps.”
“These are some stamps from Canada ”.“ This stamp is from China”
B . Review:
The using way of „be from‟ 2． Make students talk about hobbies.
3、Teaching point: Key words：
collect
stamp
hobby
men
women
another
4、Teaching difficulty: A.； men and man B ; collect
5、Task design: A. Learning task:
To learn words： collect
stamp
hobby
men
women
another To learn the structure: “I‟ve got lots of stamps.”
“These are some stamps from Canada ”.“This stamp is from China” B. To use the task: 1：AB Unit1 exercise 3 2：AB Unit2 exercise
1、
2、
4、5 3：You do action and I gue .4 : “Your hobby is doing….”
第一课时
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss
(2) Game: you do action and I gue .(3)Write down the sentence: Your hobby is doing sth Exercise “Your hobby is….(3) Free talk: Student talk about their hobbies: T: My hobby is reading books, what‟s your hobby?(My hobby is doing sth) S：My hobby is …..
2、Leading :
（1）A.ask “What can you see? What‟s this? ” S: It‟s a stamp.T: What are these? S: These are some stamps.How to use :a stamp
and some stamps Teacher help the students say: This stamp is from….
(b.) Students watch PPT and make sentences with “This stamp is from….” “These stamps are from…”
(c.) Teacher shows some stamps and teach “These stamps are from…”
(d.) Students make sentences with “These stamps are from…” B.Game : Gueing game Students watch PPT
T: What‟s are these? S: These are stamps.Teacher give numbers to each stamp, then describe the picture of one of them, Students gue which number it is.T: This one has got a… on it.S: Number 3.Then reverse.C.Lead in T: Everyone has hobby, now listen to the tape , find out what Simon‟s hobby is.
3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures e.What‟s Simon‟s hobby? f.Where are the stamps from? c.Has Simon got any stamps from China? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: collect
stamp
hobby
men
women
another b.Students practice to make sentences with the key points. c.Game：Paing wordcards make sentences
4、（Drilling and Counselling） （1）Finish SB U1 exercise3. (2) Pairwork.
6．Teaching handwriting：
“This stamp is from….” “These stamps are from…”
三.课后反思:
第二课时
Step1.Game: Extend the sentence T: I‟ve got lots of apples.
S1: I‟ve got lots of apples and bananas.S2: I‟ve got lots of apples, bananas and pears .
…….
Step2.Review the words: collect
stamp
hobby
men
women
another
Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles
Step4.Talk about stamps (SB book activity 3) a.Number those stamps.b.Teacher describe one of the stamp with the main sentence structure given on the blackboard: “This stamp is from….”.“It has got …..on it”.
Step5 Homework: g.word dictation h.recite paragraph one i.Students make role play about unit one.
Step6.课后反思
第三课时
Step1.a.Students make role play.
b.Give words dictation.
c.Open Activity Book.
Step2.Do exercise 1.e.Play the recording again, then encourage them to tell the important things in the story.f.Then, tell them to read the sentences in the exercise and decide if they are „True‟, „False‟ or „Don‟t know‟.( Explain that they should tick „Don‟t know‟ if the answer is not found in the dialogue.)
Step3.Do exercise 2.Now correct the false statements.Student A read the first false statement in Exercise1.Student B corrects.
Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets, students fill the blank
Step5.课后反思
第2单元教案
I’ve got a hobby
Teaching preparing:
2、Studends book：Module2Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task: 2．Basic task:
To learn to speak the structure: “Have you got any dolls from Japan ” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t” B．Review: Grammer 2．Talking about your hobbies.
3、Teaching difficulty: any/some
5、Task design: Review words： collect
stamp
hobby
men
women
another To learn “Have you got any dolls from Japan ” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t”
6、Teaching things: Radio
photo
picture
wordcards 第四课时
1、Warm up ⑴ Musical game “What‟s your hobby?” “ My hobby is doing sth” (3) Watch PPT T: Students please watch PPT, What are these?
Can you gue what Mi Ma‟s hobby is? S: Your hobby is flying kites.( PPT explains some kites and any kites) T: Yes, have you got any kites? “Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t” 2Leading : （1）A.Ask and answer T: Have you got any books? S1: Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t.Have you got any ….s? S2: Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t.Have you got any ….s? B.Practice a.) Go through all the pictures with the students to make sure that they know the vocabulary.2) Teacher write the main structure on the board: “Have you got any…..” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t” 3) Students practice with partner
3、Presentation: Ss do exercise 3 Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…
4、Drilling and Counselling Learn the chant: “HOBBY” a.Students listen to the tape.b.Students repeat
第五课时(REVIEW) Step1 Warm up:
Sing the song: “HOBBY”
Step2 Do activity book Activity 1 Listen and answer the questions.
Step3
Activity 3 Answer the questions.a.Students complete the questions according to their own situation.b.Students work in pairs:
A keeps the book open and asks questions B closes his book and answer A‟s questions.c.They exchange the roles.
Step4 Homework e.Do exercise 3 f.words dictation.
课后反思：
本单元的内容涉及到 my hobby(我的爱好),让孩子准备的课堂用具孩子没能做充分的准备.因此在课堂上孩子们谈论说的时间就缩短了.另外重点句型的操练,孩子们也很快的领会了.Module Four Happy Thanksgiving !
Teaching preparin 1． Student book：Module1Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task: 2．Basic task: Key words： festival
special
meal
sound Key sentences:
“What do you do on …..”
“Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.”
“We say „thank-you‟ for our food, family and friends.”
C．Review: “Can you tell me more about…..”and“… is my …”
3、Teaching point: Words ： festival
special
meal
sound
4、Teaching difficulty festival sound “Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.” “We always have a special meal.”
5、Task design:
To learn words ：festival
special
meal
sound
To learn sentences: “What do you do on …..” “Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.” “We always have a special meal.”
“We say „thank-you‟ for our food, family and friends.”
1：SB Unit 1 exercise
2、3
2: AB Unit 1exercise
1、
2、
3、
4、5
6、Teaching things radio photo wordcards picture
第一课时
1、Warm up ⑴ Sing a song “We wish you a merry Christmas.” Competition: List festivals as many as poible.2 Leading : （1）a.（Watch PPT— pictures about Chinese festivals） Ask questions: “what is this festival?”
“What do we do at that festival?” b.Then show the PPT of main sentence structures: “… is my favorite festival, we always do (something)”
Students look at pictures and talk about festivals in pairs with the main structures offered.c.Students show there ideas with their partner.B.Lead in
1) T: You know much about Chinese festival, how many western festival do you know? Students list the western festivals .
T: Very nice! Today Simon will tell us more about American festival, listen to the tape and later you must tell me about them.
3、Presentation: (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.What can you see? Students answer the questions.(2) Give the questions: “What are the two American festivals in the story?” “What do people do on Flag Day?” “What do people do on Thanksgiving Day?” (3) Answer the questions.
4、Drilling and Counselling （1） Game: Gueing(T vs Ss) a.Prepare three word cards: Thanksgiving Day
Flag Day
Christmas Day b.Teach them to read.c.Teacher describes the activities that people do in different festival.T: You can see Christmas trees.Ss: Christmas Day 6.Homework： a.Write the new words.b.Collect Chinese and American festival information.
第二课时
Step1.Game: Gueing (Ss1 vs Ss2):
Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles.
Step2 Discuion
Step3.Students make role plays about western festivals with their partner. Step4.Homework: a.word dictation b.recite paragraph two
: 第三课时
Step1.Give words dictation
Step2.Open Activity Book, do exercise 1: Listen to the story again and tick or cro.a.Students read the questions.b.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.c.Teacher gives help, students finish the question.d.Play the tape, students finish the exercise.
Step3.Do exercise3.Complete the table.a.Review “ I,
me,
we,
our” b.Complete the table
Step4.Do exercise
5 Write about Spring Festival.a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.Ss: Watch TV Talk with each other.Play games.
Leon four
What’s your favorite festival?
1、Teaching preparing:
Teaching task: Student book： Module1Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3
2、Teaching task ：
Basic task:
Key words：lantern
race
moon cake
Key sentences: “What‟s your favorite festival?”
“My favorite festival is ……” 3
Teaching point: ：
Lantern Festival
Spring Festival
Mid-Autumn Festival Dragon Boat Festival
race
moon cake “What‟s your favorite festival?”
“My favorite festival is ……”
4、Teaching : lantern, moon
5、Task design: To learn words ：
festival
special
meal
sound To learn sentences： Lantern Festival
Spring Festival
Mid-Autumn Festival
Dragon Boat Festival
race
moon cake
二、
1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss
Ss—Ss (2)Do the chant, review “I, me, we, our” (3)Play a matching game:
Thanksgiving Day
Sing flag song
Flag Day
Receive presents
Christmas Day
Cheat each other
Ask volunteers to finish the matching.(4)Ask students to add more activities.
2、导入 （Leading ） （1）A.1Watch PPT
T: What‟s this festival? S: It‟s ……
Students learn to read Lantern Festival
Spring Festival
Mid-Autumn Festival
Dragon Boat Festival B.Game: Gueing game
T: (mimes rowing a boat) S: Is it Dragon Boat Festival? T: Right! b.Students do practice in pairs: choose a festival, ask and gue.
3、Presentation: (1)S open their books (2) listen to the tape
(3) Replay sentence by sentence (4) Students repeat after each sentence.(5) Students try to recite one of the festival.
4、Drilling and Counselling StudentA chooses a festival, studentB asks and if he or she can‟t gue out, he can ask “Tell me more.” unle he got the answer. 第五课时
Step1 Warm up: Play a game：“Sentence paing”
Rules: Students ask and answer one to the next to review:
“What‟s your favorite festival?”“My favorite festival is ……”
Step2 Do activity 3.Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…
Step3 Do Activity Book Activity 1 Listen and complete the sentences.a.T show many pictures, if they like the picture they stand up and teacher count: “X students like…”; if they don‟t like they remain seated.
a.Ss read the questions with teacher‟s help.b.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help
Homework 1.Do exercise 4 2.words dictation. 课后反思：
通过对本单元的小测验,孩子们对这节课的知识掌握的还不错.孩子们也已经知道了外国节日和中国节日不同.有的孩子上网查了许多关于节日的资料,在班里和其他的孩子一起分享.
第12篇：初中英语全英教案
A teaching plan
教材分析 学情分析 Contents: 1.Vocabulary： 2.Structure: 3.Dialogue: 4.listening: Objectives:
1.Teaching Aims and Demands (1) Instructional Objectives
Be able to use the new words and phrases:
(2) Ability Objectives Be able to use listening skills to comprehend their dialogues, such as listen for specific information etc.
Be able to use what they learned to describe what they can do and give responses.Be able to use the language they learned to finish a dialogue and a short paage.
(3)Educational Objectives
Arousing students’ interest and helping them learn by using pictures.
Building their confidence by step by step approach and careful scaffolding.2.Teaching Importance To master the key vocabulary
To understand and use the target language To master the usage of the different forms of “can” in the target language.3.Teaching Difficulties To enable the students to understand the sentence patterns to talk about the ability activities.
To enable the students to use the target language
The students learned the structure “can do sth”, So it’s difficult and important to let them understand it can also be used to talk about the ability activities.
4.Teaching Aids Multi-media computer, Tape recorder and so on. 5.The Teaching Methods (1) Communicative teaching method. (2) Audio-visual teaching method. (3)Task-based teaching method.6.Studying Ways (1)Let the Ss pa \"Observation—Imitation—Practice\" to study language.(2)Let the Ss pay attention to the key information in listening practice.(3)Enable the Ss to study English language by Communication.(4)Let the Ss know that conclusions and being good at thinking are neceary to learn English well.
Procedures and Time Allotment: 2 Task1: Warming-up(2mins) Before cla, get Ss to enjoy an English song for about 2 minutes to warm them up.The purpose of the task-based activities is to Interest the students Task 2:Lead-in(3mins) 1.Use the PPT to lead in the new leon..show some pictures and teach the words and phrases: 2.ask Ss read the words together.Task3: Play a game(4mins) Task 4: Presentation(8mins) The purpose of the task-based activities is to let the students learn to cooperate with each other and practice the language points, improve the students’ abilities of speaking.Task5: Representations(5mins) Task 6.Listening(5mins) 1.Ask Ss to open their books and turn to Page 59.Look at part 1b, look at the conversations and make sure the students understand the conversations and what to do.Then play the tape for three times.For the first time the students only listen to understand the whole general meaning of the conversations.For the second time the Ss pay attention to the activity in each conversation and write them in the blanks.For the third time the Ss pay attention to the time that the activities in each conversation are done and number the conversations (1-3).Ask some Ss to check their answers.
2.Practice the conversations in 1b.Then make your own 3 conversations.The purpose of the task-based activities is to practice listening and improve the students’ abilities of listening.Task 7 .Make a survey(7mins)
Give the students several minutes to prepare the survey using the target language to ask and answer, next fill the form : Finally ask two groups of the students to report their results.For example: Task 8. Summary(4 mins) Summarize the key language points in groups , and show them on the screen to help the Ss take notes.Task 9. Homework(2mins) 1.Consolidate and review the expreions of the leon.2.Write a short paage about the results of the survey.
Blackboard design
第13篇：高中英语全英教案
高中英语教案
I. Teaching focus
1.Realize the damage caused to the world and figure out the reasons.
2.Find ways to stop the earth from being polluted by discuing in groups.
II.Teaching approaches Elicitation, Mutual Interaction
III.Teaching aid Interactive multimedia teaching
IV.Teaching proce
Step 1
Revision 1. Check note-making
Earth: not enough rain, too many cattle, cutting down trees, strong winds Air: smoke from factories, power stations, cars, chemical rain, accidents at power stations and factories Water: waste from factories and cities
Step 2
Presentation
1． Present a series of images depicting the natural beauty of the earth, then the pollution.Highlight the sharp contrast between them.Guide the students to the conclusion: The earth used to be much more beautiful than now; the earth is in danger due to the increasing pollution.
2． Study the map on the textbook, then scan the paages to figure out where on the world atlas the damage has happened.Encourage the students to give out their point of view toward the pollution iue.
Step 3
Audiovisual Learning
The students watch a video on the text, then do the following true or false questions.
1.
Many parts of the world with large population and plenty of crops have become deserts.
T 2. Land may become poor if farmers do not limit the numbers of their cattle.
T 3. Good soil is gradually lost these days as trees are being cut down.
T 4. Air pollution and water pollution are the two causes of the problem that many parts of the world have become deserts.
F 5. Chemicals in the smoke from power stations can travel hundreds of miles in the wind before falling down to the ground in the rain.
F 6. After a bad accident at a nuclear power station, 50% of the trees in Germany were damaged.F 7. The writer to explain how water is polluted uses the examples of the accidents in both India and Ruian.
F 8. Once oceans are polluted, they are not able to clean themselves. F
Step 4
Intensive Reading Read the paages again for some detailed information 1.
To say something about the damage that is caused to the world by pollution, using the information from the text.Try to present poible ways to help solve the problems. Phenomena Causes Suggestions
EARTH The area of desert is growing every year. Cattle eat gra. Limit the number of the cattle.Good soil is gradually lost. Trees being cut down; strong winds blowing the valuable soil away.Plant more trees and try to protect them.
AIR
Air is being polluted. Factories, power stations and cars produce a lot of waste. A lot of things have to be done to reduce pollution.New laws should be paed and people should realize how serious the problem is.
A lot of people died from polluted air in both Ruia and India. There were serious accidents that polluted the air.Trees in the forest are destroyed and fish in the lakes are killed.
Chemical rain.
WATER In some places it’s no longer safe for swimming, nor is it safe to eat the fish.
Factories and cities produce a lot of waste.
Same as above.
Lake Baikal, which used to be cleanest I the world, s now polluted. Waste produced from a chemical factory.2.to summarize the text by giving the main idea of each paage.Earth:
The area of desert is growing and good soil is gradually lost.Air:
Chemicals in the smoke cause a lot of damage and serious accidents took place from time to time.Water: Water pollution is caused by man’s waste. The waters of this great lake have been dirtied and 4800 square km of ocean were polluted by oil. Step 5
Discuion Appoint one student to host the discuion.The rest of the cla fall into groups of 4, changing ideas on the following question.
(1)What kind of pollution can you think of? (2)Why trees are important? (3)What are the causes of water pollution? (4) What can be done to stop land from becoming into desert? (5) What else do we know about the problems that the earth is facing? (6) What steps should we take to save the earth? Step
Role play
The students take turns to play the role of a newspaper reporter, making interviews with heads of factories (e.g.A papermaking factory) which are seriously polluting air and/or water.Record the interviews and compose a report.
Step
7 Aignment （1）Read the additional materials about pollution and do the reading comprehension exercises.
（2）Finish the report.
Thanks for attending this cla!
_____________________________________________________________________________--__
资料
我国环境污染现状令人担忧
据专家估计，中国每年因环境污染造成的损失达到二千八百三十亿元人民币，其中，仅水污染一项，估计一年造成经济损失约五百亿元。
据香港《东方日报》报导，自六十年代至今，中国有环境监测的四百三十二条大小河流中，八成受到不同程度的水体污染，其中大江河经过城镇河段的占二成，支流受污染的占六成，全中国二千八百多个湖泊，凡能接纳城镇污水的，大多出现水体负氧化现象。由于地下水过度开采，京津沪大面积出现土地沉降一点五公尺至二公尺，桂林溶岩区三十米地下水重金属超标十至二十倍。
大气污染造成的经济损失约为二百亿元，由于城市燃煤、工厂排放废气及汽车死气污染，大气中二氧化硫、一氧化碳等有毒悬浮微粒弥漫在城市上空，空气污染导致许多城市肺癌死亡率增至万分之二，全国酸雨覆盖面积已达百分之三十，所有这些损失加起来也等于二百亿元。
而生态环境破坏和自然灾害造成的损失估计高达二千亿元，森林覆盖率由四九年的三成左右，现已下降至不足一成四，草原的严重退化，水土流失面积达一百五十五万平方公里，占国土面积的百分之十六。
同时，城镇建设却仍以每年侵占一百五十万公顷土地的速度发展，破坏自然生态平衡，加上自然灾害带来的损失，每年至少损失二百亿元。
其他污染如固体废物排放、噪音污染等造成的损失也高达一百三十亿元。
专家分析表示，造成环境污染引起的经济损失原因众多，但国家工业规划布局失误，调控措施不力和公民环保意识不强是主要原因。
我的体会；
学习了该教案后，我总结体会两点。
一、该教案在教学设计上非常注重学生能力的培养，充分利用教材和多媒体手段逐步引导学生理解课文，并能进一步升华课文的主题，使学生受到心灵的启迪和道德的震撼。一切都水到渠成。
二、教案所附资料可在课堂中充分被学生利用，使他们的讨论言之有据，会使他们更乐于知识的学习和掌握。这点可以作为我今后很好的借鉴
第14篇：全英英语教师求职信
830 Shanghai Road
Zunyi , Guizhou 563000
May 30,2012
Mack
219 Beijing Road
Kaili, Guizhou 561000
Dear Sir or Madame :
I am writing in response to your ad in the zhaopin.com for a position listed as junior middle school English teacher .I believe my stable-based English knowledge and abundant experience make me an excellence candidate for this position.
I graduated from Zunyi Normal College and I nearly spent 12 years on the elementary and comprehensive study, then 4 years on the major study of English .Especially through the 4 years’ English study, I have gained in-depth knowledge of many English subjects which include Integrated skills of English, Pronunciation and Intonation of English, Oral English, Extensive Reading ,Courses in English literature, English Writing, Listening , Translation, Course in English Grammar, Linguistics, etc.
Concerning my related experience, I had been employed as a part-time teacher in the foreign language training school for elementary and junior middle school students more than one time .In those position ,I not only taught students English (including Oral English, Grammar, Pronunciation, etc.) but also in charge of them.Thanks to such experience, I learned how to use a comprehensible way to explain complicated problem, and develop superior interpersonal skills between teacher and students and among colleagues.
I plan to use my employment in the English teaching field and make good use of what I have learnt about English.To be a teacher is my dream throughout the first 21 years.
Enclosed is a resume that provides more details about my background.I am very excited by an opportunity such as the one you advertised.Though I am in short of experience in some special field, I am ready to seize the chance to test myself.I am1
young, energetic and eager to learn something new and challengeable, I am willing to study harder than others, and absorb others’ strengths to make up for my shortcomings.I sincerely hope I could do a favor to your school.
May you and your school a more promising and prosperous future!
Sincerely,
( signature )
Lily
Applicant
Enclosure: resume
第15篇：小学英语全英说课稿
英语全英说课稿
（一）
Intepetation
Good moning, ladies and gentlemen.It’s my geat hono and pleasue to be hee shaing my leon with you.I have been eady to begin this epesentation with five pats.Analysis of the teaching mateial, the teaching aims, the impotant and difficult points, the studying methods, and the teaching pocedue.
Pat 1 Teaching Mateial
The content of my leon is New Senio English fo China Book___ Unit____________________.This unit is about____________________ （topics）。 By studying of this unit, we’ll enable students to know_________________________ and develop the inteest in___________________.At the same time, let the students lean how to____________________ （functional items）。 Fom this leon, it stats___________________________（stuctues）。 （As we all know, eading belongs to the input duing the poce of the language leaning.The input has geat effect on output, such as speaking and witing.） Theefoe, this leon is in the impotant position of this unit.If the Ss can maste it well, it will be helpful fo them to lean the est of this unit.
Pat 2 Teaching Aims
Accoding to the new standad cuiculum and the syllabus （新课程标准和教学大纲）， and afte studying the teaching mateial, the teaching aims ae the followings:
1.Knowledge objects （语言目标：语音，词汇，语法，功能，话题）
（1）The Ss can maste the usage of the impotant wods and expeions.
（2）The Ss can use the __________________ （gamma） in the pope situation.
（3）The Ss can undestand the content of the leon, talk about _______________________ （infomation） and get thei own idea about _______________________________.
2.Ability objects （技能目标：听，说，读，写）
（1） To develop the Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, eading and witing
（2） To guide Ss to set up effective studying stategies.
（3） To impove the student’s eading ability, especially thei skimming and scanning ability.
（4） To tain the Ss’ abilities of studying by themselves and coopeating .
3.Emotion o moal objects （情感目标：兴趣，自信，合作，爱国，国际视野）
（1）By completing the task, the Ss incease thei inteest in ____________________and set up self-confidence in _____________________.
（2）Teach the Ss_________________________, put the moal education in the language study.
Pat 3 the Impotant and Difficult Points
Based on the equiement of the syllabus.
The impotant points ae__________________________ such as ______________.
The difficult points ae_________________________ fo example_____________.
Pat 4 Teaching Methods
As is known to us all, a good teaching method equies that the teache should help Ss develop good sense of the English language.Fo achieving these teaching aims, （afte the analysis of the teaching mateial and teaching aims,） I will use the following methods accoding to the moden social communication teaching theoies（现代社会交际教学理论） .
1.Communicative Appoach（交际教学法）
2.Whole Language Teaching（整体语言教学法）
3.Task-based Language Teaching （任务教学法）
4.Total Situational Action （情景教学） a \"scene — activity\" teaching method , it establishes a eal scene and the inteaction between the teache and the Ss.At the same time, CAI （电脑辅助教学） can povide a eal situation with its sound and pictue, it can develop the Ss ceativity in leaning English.
Pat 5 Teaching Pocedue
Step 1.Lead-in.（_____min）
___________________________________________________________________
Pupose of my design: （1） to catch Ss’ attention about the cla/topic/paage.
（2） To set up suspense/develop inteest in _______________.
Step 2.Pe-eading
Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Let Ss _____________________________________________________________
Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
___________________________________________________________________
Now, let’s see what happened to the_______________/ let’s check whethe it is ight o not.
Pupose of my design: （1） to get to know something about the _________________.
（2） To have a bette undestanding about the impotance of ___________________.
Step 3.While-eading
Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Skimming: Ss should ead the mateial fast to find out the main idea/topic sentence fo each paagaph.
Paa 1 ___________________
Paa 2 ___________________
Paa 3 ___________________
…
Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Scanning: Listen to the tape pat by pat to finish ___________________________.
Task 3.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Scanning: Guide Ss to ead the mateial caefully and take some impotant notes, then answe the following questions.
Task 4.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Scanning: Ask Ss to ead the mateial caefully and find out the coect answes to finish the following chat.
Pupose of my design: Enable students to undestand the given mateial bette by using diffeent eading skills.And pope competition can aouse the Ss’ inteest in English leaning.\"Task-based\" teaching method is used hee to develop the Ss’ ability of communication and also thei ability of co-opeation will be well tained.
Step 5.Post-eading
Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
（接task3）Ask Ss to close books and finish the summay accoding thei notes.
（接task4）etell the stoy /Sum up the paage in Ss’ own wods accoding to the chat.
Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）
Discu _______________________________________________with othe goup membes and then choose a epote to shae thei opinions about ____________________________________ with the whole cla.
Pupose of my design: I think If the Ss can finish this task well, they will benefit a lot in thei spoken English.Most Ss can take thei pats in the activities, especially fo the Ss who have touble in English study.
Step 5.Homewok
1.__________________________________________________
2.__________________________________________________
Pupose of my design: Homewok is so impotant and neceay fo to maste the knowledge they leaned afte cla.It will check whethe the Ss achieve the teaching aims.
英语全英说课稿
（二）
The leon I am going to talk about is fom the teaching mateialBook One ,Unit 8.the thid pat that is used by the kids in Gade One .
一、Analysis of the teaching mateial （说教材）
This is a dialogue that happens in the fuit shop .seveal sentences suound selling and buying the fuit will be leaned .Duing the fist and the second pat in this unit ,the kids have undestood simple instuctions and act accodingly ,and they can say simple wods ,phases o sentences by looking at objects and the pictues .eg: lychee, banana, apple,\"What’s this ?It’s an apple.\"In Unit seven ,we gasped the numbes fom one to ten .The main language points in this unit is to make sentences using the fuit and numbes feely and communicate with othes in English in the fuit shop.And pay close attention to the single and plual foms of the nouns .Accoding to the kids’ English level and the coesponding content in the daily life ,I give them some exta extending .To tain thei ability of communicate with the othes in English ,I pepae the following design .Teaching aims （教学目标）
1.knowledge and skill aims :（知识技能目标）
eview the names of the ten diffeent kinds of fuit and ecognize the numbes fom one to ten .
Undestand simple instuctions about the numbes and act accodingly.
Pactice English and communicate with othes in the situation.
2.Equip them with the emotion ,attitude and value goals :（情感、态度、价值目标）
Cultivate the spiit of co-opeations in the goup wok
Bing up the good quality of potect and make fiends with the animals .Teaching impotance :（教学重点）
1.Make sentences using the fuit and the numbes .\"Six oanges ,please .’
2.Distinguish the diffeence between the single fom and the plual foms of the nouns .\"one apple / two apples …\"
3.The sentences used when selling and buying the fuit in a fuit shop.
Teaching difficulties :（教学难点）
1.Distinguish the diffeence between the single and the plual foms of the nouns .
2.Tain thei ability of communicating with othes in English .
Teaching aids ;（教具准备）
Multimedia , flash cads ,fesh fuit and aangements and decoations of the fuit shop .
Teaching methods :（教学方法）
Task objective teaching method .TP method , pefomance and games methods .
二、Analysis of the leanes :（说学习者）
We ae facing the 5 to 6-yea-old little kids who just gaduated fom the kindegaten ,and they can not tell the diffeence between kindegaten and the pimay school.sometimes they even don’t know how to behave in the cla.So ,I think the most impotant thing fo me to do is to attact thei inteests and make them love English and feel confident in this subject .so ,I will play some inteesting games with them ,show them the funny catoon movie and ole the plays in the text o have a competation.we should not only focus on the language point itself ,but also set up the eal cicumstance whee I can encouage them to expe themselves bette .What I ty my best to do is to aouse the kids’ inteests and potect thei enthusiasm.三、Analysis of the teaching methods （说教法）
says that duing the Foundation Education peiod ,the total goal fo English leon is to impove the pupils’ ability of compehensive using language .It pomotes task teaching stuctue .Accoding to the little kids’ physical and psychological chaacteistics of keeping cuios ,active and imitating and showing themselves .I adopt the \"task –eseach—constuct \" teaching methods and oganize the cla to focus on the impotance and solve the difficulties .I give the pupils an open and elaxed cicumstance in which they can lean to obseve ,think and discu .duing this pocedue ,the pupils’ ability of thinking and using language is developed vey well .四、Analysis of the teaching pocedues .（说教学过程）
1.Wam up .（歌曲热身）
All the cla sing English song \"Ten little Indian boys \" to aouse thei inteests and help them to step into English leaning cicumstance happily.
2.eview the fuit and the numbes those we leaned in the fist and the second pat in this unit .（复习数字和水果）
A.Watch a funny video .and answe the questions .（lean moe fuit and pactice moe sentence pattens eg: stawbey / watemelon/ pineapple /chey） ask some questions .
What’s this ?
What colou is it ?
How many bananas ae thee ?
Do you like eating bananas ?
What is you favouite fuit ?
Encouage them to open thei mouth and speak English as much as they can .
B.Play gueing game .to eview the spelling of the wods using the basic ponunciation knowledge .
C.Play a game named \"up and down \".emphasis on distinguishing the single and plual foms of the nouns .
3.Guide the pupils to the main teaching points .（引入新课）
To compehensive use the numbes and the fuit that is a needed in a fuit shop .Ask two voluntees to come to the font and choose the ight numbe cads and stick it beside the ight fuit accoding to the othe pupils’ instuctions .The quicke one will be the winne .
Eg: Six oanges ,please .
4.Time to pactice fo all the cla （全体同学操练）。
The pupils choose the ight cads they have pepaed and put them up above thei heads when they hea the teache’s instuctions and give them to the teaching answeing loudly: \"Hee you ae .’
5.Watch a video （观看多媒体，了解本课故事情节）
undestand what’s happening in the stoy ,（This pat is impotant, easonable and effective）and guide them to potect and make fiends with the animals .
Pesent the situation of a fuit shop .the teache will act a shopkeepe and invite a bette pupil to be the custome and finish all the buying steps .
Shopkeepe : Good moning .
Custome : Good moning .
Shopkeepe : Can I help you ?
Custome : Yes ,six oanges ,please .
Shopkeepe : Hee you ae .
Custome : Thank you vey much .
Shopkeepe : You ae welcome .
6.Consolidation and Pactice（巩固和练习）
Goup wok : Divide the cla into eight goups and evey goup will be decoated into a fuit shop, ask one pupil to be the shopkeepe and the othe membes in this goup will be the customes .Encouage them to buy and sell the fuit with what they leaned in this pat ,I design a eal situation that is common in ou daily life and the kids will not feel uncomfotable o unfamilia with it, The teache will go aound the cla and supply the help to the unable ones .In such a peace and pleasant situation they like to speak the dialogue they leaned to expe themselves .They can feel the succe and become confident in speaking English .
7.Conclusion （总结）
The teache would lead the cla to ead the sentences on the boad and ask some moe difficult questions .Maybe the pupils can not undestand them clealy ,but it doesn’t matte .we just give the pupils moe infomation about the language and give them the bette language cicumstances that can help them in the futue leaning .
8.Homewok : （家庭作业）
Encouage the pupils to design a little fuit shop at home and teach thei family the dialogue in the fuit shop .When they pactice this , they should take photos and show the othe pupils the next day .
In this leon , what I design （not only the pesentation of the main teaching points ,but also the activities） attact the pupils inteests .They lean and pactice while playing .I think it’s eally a good leon of high quality.
9.Black design （ 板书设计）
第16篇：小学英语全英说课稿
小学英语全英说课稿范文——
Good afternoon , Ladies and Gentlemen ! My name is Wu Dan .I come from Yu Hong Primary School .I am very glad to be standing here and talking about Leon 10 ,which is from Fun with English Book 3 Unit 2 .My teaching report includes four parts .Part 1 To analyze the book 1.There are 3 units in Book 3 .This is Leon 10 .The central item is how to master another sentence to expre “ What’s the time ? ” and how to buy something.Using “ What’s the time ? ” hungry , cakes, bread and so on .We’ll study and drill the sentences and the word ’s pronunciation .
2.According to the teaching outline and combining the students ’ situation , I make the teaching aims of this leon as follows .a .The first is the aim of knowledge .It’s to learn and master two sentences.What time is it? I am hungry and then using them to expre the time and go shopping fluently and freely b.The second is the aim of abilities The
creative spirit is quite important to the students.So I will pay much attention to train it in my cla.Otherwise.I will try to train the students listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities, Mainly improve their communicative abilities and encourage them to speak more English.C.The third is the aim of emotion Make the students have succeful feeling and achievement.And make them be in English study.3.Important points The first is to master and use the two sentences.What time is it? I’m hungry.The second is to master the usage of the words hungry, cakes and bread.4.Difficult points.It’s the pronunciation of the two words.hungry, cakes, and how to use them fluently and freely .Part 2 .Teaching and learning methods Make the students take part in cla .Ask and answer in pairs and groups .I’ll use communicative method , discuing method and seeing and hearing method to teach this leon .Part
3 .Teaching aids .In order to interest the students .I’ll use a clock , recorder , cards and some food as my teaching aids .Part 4 .Teaching procedure .Step 1 Revision Before my cla , I’ll get the students to sing an English song to keep themselves relax .Then I’ll use a clock to act it .What’s the time ? What’s the time ? It’s eight o’clock .I’ll show three numbers .When the students answer It’s ten o’clock .I’ll say : It’s ten .Today we’ll learn Leon Ten .Then I\'ll put the clock on the blackboard .Step 2 Presentation and drill First I’ll point to the clock and ask , what time is it ? Students answer It’s ten .Then I go on moving the hands and ask .What time is it ?Students answer quickly .Second I’ll drill the sentences What time is it ? It’s ----- .pairs in pairs or row by row .Third When the students answer It’s 12:00 o’clock .I’ll point to my stomach and say .Oh I’m hungry .and I’ll eat a cake .
Then I’ll go on saying I’m hungry .and I’ll eat another cake .I’ll act it four or five times .Then I ask a student to act it .I’m hungry , too .I’ll say two cakes , please .and the sentences .I’m hungry .Two cakes ,please. Forth :Listen to the dialogue and answer my questions.1.What time is it? 2.How many cakes? Step 3 Consolidation I’ll train the creative spirit of the students.
I’ll give them three please.To act the dialogue freely .First at the 219 Park,second fruit shop Third department store.Step4.Homework Encourage my student to the market to buy something with his friends or parent.小
第17篇：英语说课稿(全英版)
Good morning/evening, everyone.It is my great honor and pleasure to be here sharing my leon with you.
My number is _______, the content of this leon is __________.
I have been ready to finish this leon in 7parts.
(我准备从以下7个方面来完成这次说课内容)
Part 1 analysis of the teaching material
（第1部分 分析教材）
The content of this leon unit is talk about words, phrases and patterns, such asThis leon is in the important position of this unit.If the Ss can master it well, it will be helpful for them to learn the rest of this unit.
Part 2 analysis of the Ss
（第2部分 分析学情）
They are active,curious and interested in new things.After learning English morn than 2 years, they have some basic English background knowledge, so I should attach the inportance to the communication with Ss, and providing them the chances of using language.
Part 3 teaching aims
（第3部分 教学目标 分为知识目标，能力目标，情感目标）
1 Aims on the knowledge
By the end of the leon, the Ss will be able to read, recoginze and use these words and phrases, such as patterns, such as 2 Aims on the abilities
By the end of the leon.The Ss can , and get useful information from the listening and reading.
Ss will be able to talk about ’ listening and speaking abilities will be developed.
3 Aims on the emotion
In this leon, the emotional aims is to arouse Ss’ interest of english learning, to foster Ss’consciousne of good-cooperation and proper competition.
To help Ss to recognize and identify the differences between Chinese and English cultures on
.
Part 4the important and difficult points
（第4部分 重点和难点）
The important points is how to help Ss ask and answer the following questions: And how to help Ss be able to listen,speak readDifficult poins are how to help Ss use the important words and patterns correctly
Part 5 teaching methods
（第5部分 教学方法）
As we all know, the main teaching aims of learning English in primary school is to cultivate pupil’s basic abilities of listening, speaking and their good sense of their english language.
So in this leon, I will mainly use “Task-based teaching method, communicative language teaching method, and TPR teaching method”
Besides, I will also arrange 4 kinds of activites: they are singing, gueing game, finishing a survey and having a competition.
Part 6 the teaching procedure
（第6部分 教学过程。我会从以下5个步骤来完成教学过程。第1步热身和复习，第2步新课呈现，第3步进行练习，第4步巩固提高，第5步复习和作业）Now , I will mainly talk about my teaching procedures.I will follow five steps.Step 1 waring up and revision
It is important to set up a better english learing situation for the pupils.So I will design two acitvities.
Activity 1 sing a song with Ss.
Purpose: the purpose of this step is to form a better english learning surrounding for the Ss, and the same time, it provides situations to review learned knowledge for the next step.
Step 2 presentation
’ interest of the leon.By playing the PPT, I will present the phrases: Purpose :the purpose of this is to present the new words and setences in the situation, which relates to the Ss’ real life experiences, to help the Ss understand the language easily and naturally.
Secondly, play a gueing game.Divide the whole cla into four groups to have a competition.Purpose; the purose of this is to review the key words and phrases one by one.And proper cometiton can arouse the Ss’ interest in english learning.
Thirdly , with the help of the CAI to set a situation to present let Ss understand it easily.Then play the caette, let the Ss listen and imitate the dialogue.Pay attention to their pronunciation and intonation.
Purpose : CAI can provide a real situation for the Ss to understand the dialogue better.And tell the Ss to Step 3 practice
This step includes mechanical activity and activities in the meaningful situation.Mechanical activity is to help Ss to recognize and read the new words and
sentences.
activities in the meaningful situation to make Ss use the new words and sentence structure in a real situation.
Purpose : the purpose of this is to draw the whole Ss’ attention to the spelling of the words.It is to help Ssto consolidate the words and structures through a true situation.Step 4 development
In this step , I will give Ss a free space to show their abilities.
First I will help the Ss finish a survey, and then let them make a new dialogue and act it out.
Task-based teaching method and communicative language teaching method are used here.
Purpose : the purpose of this step is to develop Ss’ability of communication and cooperation.Making a new dialogue is to check if Ss can use the key words, patterns and structures correctly and skillfully.
Step 5 conclusion and homework
After step 4, some pupils can grasp the knowledge well, but some pupils can’t.so revision is important, pupils should speak english after cla as much as they do in cla.It is neceary for the pupils to do some exercise after cla.So I design the following homework.
1 listen and read the content of this unit
(以上就是我教学过程的所有内容)
Part 7 blackboard design
（第7部分 板书设计）
A good Bb design can make Ss get key information in limited time.I will make a design like this:
The title of this leon is on the top of the blackboard.Divide the rest of Bb into three parts.The left is for the key words and phrases, the middle is for the main patterns and structures, while the right is for the other unimportant things.
结束语：
That’s all for my teaching design.Thanks a lot for your attention.
第18篇：小学英语全英说课稿
小学英语全英说课稿范文——
Good afternoon , Ladies and Gentlemen !
My name is Wu Dan .I come from Yu Hong Primary School .I am very glad to be
standing here and talking about Leon 10 ,which is from Fun with English Book 3 Unit 2 .My teaching report includes four parts .
Part 1 To analyze the book
1.There are 3 units in Book 3 .This is Leon 10 .The central item is how to master another sentence to expre “ What’s the time ? ” and how to buy something.Using
“ What’s the time ? ” hungry , cakes, bread and so on .We’ll study and drill the sentences and the word ’s pronunciation .
2.According to the teaching outline and combining the students ’ situation , I make the teaching aims of this leon as follows .
a .The first is the aim of knowledge .
It’s to learn and master two sentences.What time is it? I am hungry and then using them to expre the time and go shopping fluently and freely
b.The second is the aim of abilities
Thecreative spirit is quite important to the students.So I will pay much attention to train it in my cla.Otherwise.I will try to train the students listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities, Mainly improve their communicative abilities and encourage them to speak more English.
C.The third is the aim of emotion
Make the students have succeful feeling and achievement.And make them be in English study.
3.Important points
The first is to master and use the two sentences.What time is it? I’m hungry.The second is to master the usage of the words hungry, cakes and bread.
4.Difficult points.
It’s the pronunciation of the two words.hungry, cakes, and how to use them fluently and freely .
Part 2 .Teaching and learning methods
Make the students take part in cla .Ask and answer in pairs and groups .I’ll use
communicative method , discuing method and seeing and hearing method to teach this leon .
Part3 .Teaching aids .
In order to interest the students .I’ll use a clock , recorder , cards and some food as my teaching aids .
Part 4 .Teaching procedure .
Step 1 Revision
Before my cla , I’ll get the students to sing an English song to keep themselves relax .Then I’ll use a clock to act it .What’s the time ? What’s the time ? It’s eight o’clock .I’ll show three numbers .When the students answer It’s ten o’clock .I’ll say : It’s ten .Today we’ll learn Leon Ten .Then I\'ll put the clock on the blackboard .
Step 2 Presentation and drill
First I’ll point to the clock and ask , what time is it ? Students answer It’s ten .Then I go on moving the hands and ask .What time is it ?Students answer quickly .
Second I’ll drill the sentences What time is it ? It’s ----- .pairs in pairs or row by row .
Third When the students answer It’s 12:00 o’clock .I’ll point to my stomach and say .Oh I’m hungry .and I’ll eat a cake .Then I’ll go on saying I’m hungry .and I’ll eat another cake .I’ll act it four or five times .Then I ask a student to act it .I’mhungry , too .I’ll say two cakes , please .and the sentences .I’m hungry .Two cakes ,please.
Forth :Listen to the dialogue and answer my questions.
1.What time is it?
2.How many cakes?
Step 3 Consolidation
I’ll train the creative spirit of the students.
I’ll give them three please.To act the dialogue freely .First at the 219 Park,second fruit shop Third department store.
Step4.Homework
Encourage my student to the market to buy something with his friends or parent.小
第19篇：仁爱英语七年级下册案全册教案5
仁爱英语七年级下册案全册教案5
T:whereisthepyramids?
Ss:\"埃及\"。
T:Right.InEnglish\"Egypt\".
（老师板书,领读）
T:Next,please.whatisthis?
Ss:wedon’tknow. T:TheBigBen.Inchinese\"
大
本
钟\".ItisinEngland.ok.Nextone.
Ss:ThewhiteHouse.
T:whereisit?
Ss:TheUnitedStates.
T:InwhichcountrydopeoplespeakbothFrenchandEnglishasofficiallanguage?
Ss:canada.
T:Now,thisoneisGermany,inchinese\"德国\".
whatdoyouknowaboutGermany?
SomeoftheSs:car.Benzcar.（奔驰）
T:yes.AndFrance.whatdoyouknowaboutFrance?
Ss:Inchinese,\"香水\"（perfume）. T:ThelastoneisNewZealand.canyouguewhichcountry?
Ss:\"新西兰\"。
T:yes.ItisnearAustralia.Itscapitalis\"惠灵顿\"wellington.
2.（老师用卡片,轮流呈现画面,国家名称,让学生跟读,加深印象。）
Example:
T:Egypt／音标／
Ss:Egypt／音标／
T:Pyramid／音标／
Ss:Pyramid／音标／
T:Germany／音标／
Ss:Germany／音标／
T:kangaroo／音标／
Ss:kangaroo/音标/
3.（完成2。）
T:LookatthemaponPage86,readafterthetape.Pleasematchthecountrywiththerightletter.
Answers:
theUnitedStates—○B
England—○F
cuba—○H
Germany—○G
canada—○E
Australia—○D
china—○A
France—○c
Egypt—○j
4.（完成3。）
T:Listentothedialogandcheckthecorrectanswer.checkyouranswerswitheachother.
Answers:
（1）wheredoesZhouweilunwanttogoforaholiday?
cuba.
√India.
England.
（2）wheredoeswangjunfengplantogo?
√France.
theUnitedStates.
Ruia.
（3）wherewouldTonyliketogo?
Australia.
NewZealand—○I
√canada.
Germany.
（4）wheredoesZhangminghopetogo?
√Germany.
cuba.
England.
Step5
Project
第五步
综合探究活动（时间:10分钟）
.（挂出世界地图。让学生尽可能多的找出国家及其准确的位置。并收集有关国家的风俗、习惯、文化、名胜等信息。）
2.（弹性课堂。让学生自由发挥,对照世界地图,谈自己熟悉的国家及其特色,包括风俗、习惯,文化等。）
T:Talkaboutyourfavoritecountry.
Ss:Allright.
Example:
myfavoritecountryischina.Itisbig.Ithasmanyplacesofinterest.TherearetheGreatwall,Tian
’anmenSquareandsoon.chinesefoodtastesgood.chinesepeoplearefriendly.chineseclothesarebeautiful.SomebigcitieuchasBeijing,Xi
’an,kunmingarebeautiful,too.chinesenationalflagisred.TheXXolympicGameswillbeheldinchina.
Australiaisabigcountry.Theweatheriunnyanddry.Itisveryrich.Ithasmanysheep.whenchinaisinsummer,itiswinterinAustralia.whilewhenitiswinterinchina,itiummerinAustralia.onlyAustraliahaskangaroosintheworld.Australianslikeoutdoorsportsallyearround.
3.（布置作业。把收集到的各个国家的情况写下来,成为短文。为下节课作准备。）
T:writedownwhatyouknowaboutyourfavoritecountry.
GetreadyforSectionB.
附录:（挂图）（略）
SectionB
Themainactivitiesare1a,2and3a.本课重点活动是1a,2和3a。
Ⅰ.Teachingaimsanddemands教学目标
.（1）Learnsomenewwordsabouttravelsandholidays:
camera,famous,tent,raincoat,notebook,whom,prepare
（2）Learnwordsofdescribingajourney:
exciting,fantastic
（3）Reviewwordsofcountriesandmaps:
china,England,UnitedStates,Australia,canada,NewZealand,Egypt,cuba
2.Learntomakesuggestions:
whatplacehouldIvisitinyunnan? youshouldvisitDaliandLijiang.Andyoushouldn’tmiXishuangbanna.
3.Reviewhowtomakefutureplansandintentions:
Nextmonth,Iplantogotoyunnanformysummerholidays.
whatwouldyouliketoknow?
what’sthebesttimetogothere?
Ithinkyoucangoanytime.
Ⅱ.Teachingaids教具
上节课所用的十幅教学挂图／一张世界地图／一张中国地图／学生每人带一件旅游出行需带的东西或物品（尽可能不重要）
Ⅲ.Five-fingerTeachingPlan五指教学方案
Step1
Review第一步
复习（时间:5分钟）
（利用头脑风暴法复习上节课内容countriesandmaps。）
T:I
’llshowyousomepicturesonebyone.Pleasetellmethecountries
’namesandpointoutthepositionsonthemap.Areyouready?Anyonecananswermyquestions,butpleasebequick,tobethefirstone.Thenyoucanhavethechanceofansweringquestions.
Ss:Pleasebegin.
T:kangaroos.
S1:Australia.Here,onthemap.
（学生在地图上准确地指出了位置。）
T:TheBigBen.
S2:England.Here.Londonisitscapital.
T:Thepyramids.
S3:Egypt.Here.Itisasmallcountry.
T:washingtonD.c.
S4:ThecapitaloftheUnitedStates.Itishereonthemap.
T:maria.
Ss:cuba.maria’shometown.
T:Acarwithsign\"Bmw\"onit.
S6:Germany.
T:TheneighborofAmerica.
S7:canada.
T:Theredflagwithfivestarsonit.
S8:china.
T:whichcountryspeakFrench?
S9:France.
T:Thecityofwellington.
S10:NewZealand.
Step2
Presentation
第二步呈现（时间:10分钟）
.（看图Page87,谈谈昆明的天气及适宜旅游情况。）
T:TherearethreepicturesonPage87.Look,canyoutellmewhichcityitis?
Ss:kunming.／yunnan.
T:Howdoyouknow?
Ss:Therearewords\"石林\"inthepicture.
T:Now,talkaboutkunmingwithyourpartner.
（学生互相讨论。复习以前关于昆明天气的描述。）
T:Doyoulikekunming?Listentotheconversation.TrytofindZhouweilun’sdescriptionof
kunming.
Ss:ok.
（学生边听边读,边找答案。）
T:what’stheanswer?
Ss:ZhouweilunsaystheweatherisalwaysniceandkunmingistheSpringcity.
T:whatarewangjunfeng’squestions?
Ss:canyoutellmesomethingaboutyunnan?
what’sthebesttimetogothere?
what’stheweatherlikeinkunming?
whatplacehouldIvisitinyunnan?
Itsoundsreallyinterestingandexciting!Isitexpensivethere?
AndwhatshouldItakewithme?
T:whatareZhouweilun’uggestionsforhim?
Ss:Ithinkyoucangoanytime.
Theweatherisalwaysnice.kunmingistheSpringcity.youshouldvisitDaliandLijiang.Andyoushouldn
’tmiXishuangbanna.It’sfantastic.
youshouldtakeacamera,apairofsunglaes,somemoneyandsoon.
T:what’swangjunfeng’splanfornextmonth?
Ss:Heplanstovisityunnanonhiummerholidays.
T:Now,listenagain,readafterthetape.
Step3
consolidation
第三步
巩固（时间:5分钟）
.（完成1b。）
T:Listenagainandcompletethechart.Thenpracticetheconversationwithyourpartner.
Answers:
weather:alwaysnice
cost:notveryexpensive
FamousPlaces:LijiangandXishuangbanna
Thingstotake:acamera,apairofsunglaes
2.（两人一组,在班级表演对话。）
T:workinpairs.Actitoutincla.
Step4
Practice
第四步
练习（时间:10分钟）
.（小组活动。学生每人取出自己所带的旅行物品。互相说出物品的名称,谈论所带物品的原因。）
T:Now,takeoutyourthingsyouwanttobringfortraveling.Telltheotherswhatitis,andwhyyouwanttobringit.
Example:
S1:Hereisacellphone.IfIgetlost,Icanuseit.
S2:Iwanttobringwaterwithme.oritwillbeexpensivetobuy.
S3:Acamera.wecanuseittotakepictures.
S4:Ifitrains,wemayuseanumbrellaoraraincoat.SoIbringthemwithme.
S5:Ifitishot,Iwanttowearmysunglaes.Heretheyare.
S6:ThefirstthingIwanttotakeisabackpack.Itioneceary／useful.
S7:moneyisimportant,too.Iwanttobringsome.
S8:Iwanttowritesomethinginterestingdown,soIbringanotebookwithme.
S9:Atentcanbeusedforsleeping.Ihaveonehere.
S10:Andamapisneceary,too.
S11:Fruit.
S12:Food.
S13:Someclothes.
S14:...
2.（完成2。）
T:michael,kangkang,janeandmariaaregoingonatrip.whatdotheywanttotake?Listenandnumberthewordsintheorderyouhear.
3.（完成3a。）
T:makealistofotherthingsyouthinkweshouldbringonourtravels.
localarea:
Tian
’
anmenSquare,sunny,￥1000,abackpack,cellphone,someplasticbags,oldnewspapers...
Step5
Project
第五步
综合探究活动（时间:15分钟）
.（老师挂上中国地图。学生进行小组活动。）
T:Now,workinpairs.oneofyouactsasaforeigner,theotheroneactsasachinesestudent.Theforeignerwantstovisitchina,pleaseintroducesomeplacesofinteresttotheforeigner,andmakesuggestionsforhim.
Thenrepeatyourconversationtoourcla.
Example:
Foreigner:Excuseme,myboy.I
’mnewinchina.wouldyouliketotellmesomethingaboutchina,thenIcanmakemytravelplansinchina.
Student:ok.It
’smypleasure.welcometochina.First,therearemanyfamouscitiesinchina,youshouldn
’tmithem.Theyare:Shanghai,Guangzhou,kunming,chengdu,Qingdao,Xi
’an...andthecapitalcityisBeijing.manyplacesofinterestareinBeijing.youcanstaythereforseveraldays.IthinkyoushouldvisittheGreatwall.Itisthebiggestwallofallintheworld.Thechinesecallit\"TheTenthousandGreatwall\".whenyouvisitit,youmaywanttoknowhowthechinesepeoplecouldbuildsuchagreatwallthousandsofyearsago.Qingdaoisamostbeautifulcityinchina.Itisnearthesea.Ithasmanydifferentstylesofhousesthere.kunmingistheSpringcity...
2.（进行采访活动。以小组为单位。提前预约外国朋友到教室。设想他已在中国做完短期旅游,让他谈谈对中国的印象。）
T:EveryonewantstospeakEnglishwithrealEnglish.Theythinkitisinterestinganduseful.But,theyarealittlenervous,becausetheydon
’tknowhowtostarttheirtalk.Theyhavenochancetotalkwithforeigners.Todaya\"foreigner\"hascometoourcla.It’smr.Li,theteacherofEnglishinoneschoolinthesamecity.He
’ittingattheback.Pleasemakeapreparationingroupsandthenmakeaninterview.
（学生分组进行准备。）
T:well,cla.Iseeeachgrouphasmadeagoodpreparation.youarereadyforthe\"interview\"today.AndIbelieveyouknowtherulesofthe\"interview\".Doyou?Good.Let’sbegin!
Example:
Group1:Excuseme,mr.Li.mayIaskyousomequestions?
mr.Li:yes,please.
Group1:whatdoyothinkofchina?
mr.Li:Itisgreat.Ilikeit.It’sbeautiful,too.
Group1:Doyoulikechinesefood?
mr.Li:yes,verymuch.Theyaredelicious.Therearesomanykinds.Especiallychinesepeoplearefriendly.
Group1:what
’syourfavoriteplace?HaveyoueverbeentotheGreatwall?
mr.Li:myfavoriteplaceiskunming.Theweatherionice.IwenttotheGreatwalltwodaysago.
Group1:mayItakepictureswithyou?
mr.Li:yes,ofcourse.
Group1:canyouwritesomethingforme?
mr.Li:ok.
Group1:Thanks.welcometochinaagain.
mr.Li:Sure.Bye.
3.（完成3b。小组活动,写短文,作汇报。）
T:chooseoneplacetovisit.Answerthefollowingquestionstowriteapaageaboutyourtripplan,andthenreportittoyourcla.
.wherewouldyouliketogoandwhomwouldyouliketotravelwith?
2.whatplacesofinterestwouldyouliketovisit?
3.Howmuchmoneydoyouplantotake?
4.Beforeyougoonthetrip,whatwouldyouliketopackforit?
4.（布置作业。结束课堂。）
T:Pleasecollectmoreinformationaboutdifferentcountriesandcustoms,writeitdownandgetreadyfornextsection.
Sectionc
Themainactivitiesare1aand3a.（1课时）
Ⅰ.Teachingaimsanddemands教学目标
.Learnotherusefulwordsandexpreions: enter,takeoff,point,touch,finger,arrive,gift,pa,person,during,had
2.makesuggestions:
youshouldtakeoffyourshoesbeforeenteringsomeone’shome.
youshouldn’teatwithyourlefthand.
3.Talkaboutcustomsindifferentcountries. （
1）
Injapan,whenyouentersomeone
’shome,youshouldtakeoffyourshoes.
（2）InBrazil,peoplenevergooutwiththeirhairwet.
（3）Don’teatwithyourlefthandinmuslimcountries.
Ⅱ.Teachingaids教具
录音机／世界地图
Ⅲ.Five
Step1
Review第一步
复习（时间:7分钟
.（将全班分成四个小组,每组抽的每一位同学轮流说出一个已学过的国家名称,后面的同学不能重复前面说过的国名。）
T:Let
’
fingerTeachingPlan五指教学方案
splayagame.Pleasesaythenamesofcountriesyouknow.Thegroupwhichusestheshortesttimeisthebestgroup.
T:Group1,begin.
S1a:England.
S1b:France.
S1c:...
Group
Time
,在Time的一栏里分别记录各小组的用时,既便于评价,也对学生起到激励作用。）
2.（让学生说出自己所知道的和并未教学过的英文国名,鼓励学生拓展思维。）
T:Doyouknowanymorenamesofcountries?
S1:Peru.（秘鲁）
S2:mexicol.（墨西哥）
（展示一幅世界地图,教学Indonesia及muslim等词汇。）
T:Lookatthemap.HereisIndonesia.HereisPakistan.HereisIran.PakistanandIranaremuslimcountries.
Step2
Presentation
第二步
呈现（时间:8分钟）
1.（在黑板上写出如下问题。）
.Arethecustomsthesameindifferentcountries?
2.Shouldyoutakeoffyourshoesbeforeenteringsomeone’shomeinjapan?
3.canpeoplegooutwiththeirhairwetinBrazil?
4.canyoupointtoathingwithyourfootinIndonesia?
5.Dopeopleinmuslimcountrieseatwithlefthandorrighthand?
6.InThailand,canpeopletouchachildonthehead?
（让学生阅读短文,并回答以上问题）
T:Pleasereadpaagein1a,andtrytowirtedowntheanswers.
2.（核对答案）
T:Pleaseanswerthequestions.
S1:No.
S2:yes.
S3:No.
S4:No.
S5:withlefthand.
S6:No.
3.（播放录音,让学生跟读。）
T:Pleaselistentothetapeandrepeat.
Step3
consolidation
第三步
巩固（时间:15分钟）
1.（在黑板上列出关键词。）
customs
differentcountries
should
takeoffshoes
japan
gooutwiththeirhairwet
Brazil
pointtoanything
Indonesia
shouldn’t
eatwithlefthand
muslimcountries
touchachildonthehead
Thailand
（让学生根据关键词复述短文。）
T:Pleaseretellthepaage.
S:Differentcountrieshavedifferentcustoms.youshouldtakeoffshoesbeforeenteringsomeone’shomeinjapan...
2.（让学生完成1b的活动。）
T:Pleasematchthecountrieswiththerightpicturesandfillintheblanks.
3.（核对答案。）
T:Let’schecktheanswers.
S1:PictureA.youshouldn
’teatwithyourlefthandinBrazil.
S2:...
Step4
Practice
第四步
练习（时间:7分钟）
.（分小组,让学生用youshould／shouldn’t...介绍本国当地的风俗。）
T:wehaveourowncustoms.Forexample,weshouldeattworedeggsonourbirthdays.weshouldntpointtothemoononmid-autumnnight.
Pleasetelluomecustomswith\"youshould／shouldn’t...\"
S1:youshould...
S2:youshouldn’t...
2.（让学生阅读2中图表里列出的国家的不同习俗,然后写短文。）
T:Pleasereadthechart,findthedifferentcustomsinthosecountriesandwritedown.
（让学生阅读自己的短文）
T:Pleasereadyourpaagesaloud.
S1:...
3.（老师举例说明不同地区的人除了风俗不同,饮食也不同。）
T:Differentareashavedifferentcustoms.Andthepeopleindifferentareaseatdifferentfood.Fuzhoupeoplelikesweetfood.Sichuanpeoplelikehotfood.Pleasetelluomethin
’gaboutdifferentfoods.
S1:welikerice.
S2:PeopleinBeijinglikenoodles.
4.（带着问题听3a的录音。）
T:Nowpleaselistentothetape,andthenanswerthequestion.IsTibetanfoodthesameasours?
5.（核对答案。）
T:IsTibetanfoodthesameasours?
S:No,it’sverydifferentfromours.
6.（让学生跟读对话。）
T:Pleaselistentothetapeandrepeat.
（让学生练习对话。）
Practicetheconversationinpairs.
Step5
Project
第五步
综合探究活动（时间:8分钟）
.（让学生说出不同国家的不同习俗,看哪位同学能说得最全,最流利。）
T:welearneddifferentcountrieshavedifferentcustoms.Pleasetelluome.
S:Injapan...In
Brazil...
2.（讲一些场景片断,让学生判断这些人的行为对不对。）
T:I
’lltellyousomestories.Pleasetellmeinstories,whoisrightorwrongandwhy?
kumikocamebackfromschool,hewentintohishomewithhershoes.mr.GreeniseatinglunchwithchopsticksathomeinEngland.mr.Leelikeschildren.HetouchedachildontheheadwhenhewasinThailand.Lucyhadaparty,herfriendswenttothepartyearly.
（让学生做判断,并回答。）
T:Pleasetellmewhoisrightorwrong,why?
S1:kumikoiswrong.Sheshouldtakeoffhershoes.
S2:mr.Greeniswrong.Heshouldn’teatwithchopsticks.
S3:mr.Leeiswrong.Heshouldn
’ttouchachildonthehead.
S4:Lucy
’sfriendsarewrong.Theyshouldgotothepartyontimeoralittlelater.
3.Homework:
Pleasewritesomemoredifferentcustomsontheexercisebooks.
（可以让学生通过上网,去图书馆查资料获得信息。）
SectionD
Themainactivitiesare
1、2and5.（1课时）
Ⅰ.Teachingaimsanddemands教学目标
.Learntheusefulexpreions:
greeting,foreigner,politeinto
2.Reviewthewh-questionsofthesimplepasttense:
（1）Howwasyourtrip?
（2）Howlongwereyouthere?
（3）whendidyoucomeback?
3.（1）Talkaboutholidaysandtravels.
（2）Talkaboutcountries,customsandculture:
ArethesequestionspoliteorimpoliteinEnglish-speakingcountries?
①Doyouhaveanybrothersorsisters?
②wheredoyouwork?
Ⅱ.Teachingaids教具
录音机／北京风光明信片
Ⅲ.Five-fingerTeachingPlan五指教学方案
Step1
Review
第一步
复习（时间:8分钟）
.（复习世界及国内的一些著名旅游城市。）
T:weknowkangkang,maria,janeandmichaelaregoingtodifferentcountries.wangjunfengplanstovisityunnanonhisholiday.whereareyougoingforyourholiday?
S1:Xiamen.
S2:Fuzhou.
S3:Anhui.
S4:Tokyo.
S5:Sydney.
（板书这些地名。）
Xiamen
Tokyo
Fuzhou
Sydney
Anhui
（让学生说出以上城市的风景名胜。）
T:Theyarefamouscities.Inthesecities,therearealotofplacesofinterest.canyoutelluomeplacesofinterestinthesecities?
S1:Gulangyu.
S2:Gushan,ZuhaiPark.
S3:mountHuang. ┆
（板书这些名胜,对应着地名。）
Xiamen
Gulangyu
Fuzhou
Gushan,
ZuhaiPark
Anhui
mountHuang
┆
（呈现本课的关键动词visit。）
T:wecanvisitGulangyuinXiamen.Pleasetellmewhatplacew ecanvisitinthecities.
S1:wecanvisitGushaninFuzhou.
S2:wecanvisitZuhaiParkinFuzhou.
S3:...
（呈现关键动词buy。）
T:wevisittheplacesofinterest.wealsocanbuysomepresentsforourfriends.whatcanyoubuy?
S1:wecanbuyGulangyupiesinXiamen.
S2:wecanbuycombsinFuzhou.
S3:...
2.（复习上节课学习的各地的不同习俗。）
T:Differentcountrieshavedifferentcustoms.whenyoutravelinThailand,canyoutouchachildonthehead?
S1:No,weshouldn’ttouchachildonthehead.
T:Inmuslimcountries,weshouldeatwithlefthandorrighthand?
S2:Righthand.
T:InBrazil,canpeoplegooutwithhairwet?
S3:No.
Step2
Presentation
第二步
呈现（时间:8分钟）
.（完成1中的明信片。）
T:TonyisinGuilin.Hewantstosentapostcardtohisfriend,carrie.Pleaseworkalone,helphimtocompletethepostcard.
2.（核对答案。）
T:who’dliketowriteyouranswersontheblackboard?
（让学生将答案写在黑板上,并核对。）
arrived
rented
did
visited
bought
（让学生观察黑板上的答案,并发现用了动词的何种形式。）
T:Lookattheblackboard.Theyareverbs.whatformoftheverbsdoweuse?
S:Thepastform.（帮助学生回答。）
Step3
consolidation
第三步
巩固（时间:10分钟）
.（根据短文内容提问,复习过去式的特殊疑问,并解释greeting,foreigner等生词。）
T:Now,pleaseanswermyquestions.
whendidTonyarriveinGuilin?
S:HearrivedinGuilinthedaybeforeyesterday.
T:whatdidherent?
S:Herentedabike.
T:Didhedosometouring?
S:yes,hedid.
T:wheredidhevisit?
S:HevisitedForeigners’Street.
T:whatdidhebuyforjennie?
S:Heboughtabeautifulnecklaceforjennie.
2.（在黑板上呈现关键词,让学生根据关键词转述贺卡内容。）
arrived—rented—didsometouring—visited—bought
T:whocanretellthestory?
S:TonyarrivedinGuilinthedaybeforeyesterday.Herentedabike...
3.（把学生按前后桌四人分组,让学生根据自己的旅游经历,在小组里相互介绍,并推选
出表达最好的学生,向全班同学汇报。）
T:Everyonehadatrip.Pleasetalkaboutyourtripinthegroup.
（小组里同学进行相互口头交流旅游经历。）
T:who’dliketotelluomethingaboutyourtrip?
S1:IwenttoFuzhouinmay.IvisitedGushanandZuhaiPark.Iboughtacomb.
S2:...
（学生没有学过的词汇,可用汉语代替,教师帮助他们用英语表达。）
Step4
Practice
第四步
练习（时间:10分钟）
.（向学生简介英语国家有不同于我国的习俗。）
T:weknowdifferentcountrieshavedifferentcustoms.Forexample:Inchina,whenyoumeetyourfriends,weoftengreetwith\"你吃
了
没
有
？
\",\"
你
要
去
哪里?\",canwegreetanEnglishmanlikethis?
S:Ha!Ha!No.
2.（播放2的听力,让学生根据听力内容,做出选择。）
w:weknowinEngland,wecan
’’tasksomequestionsaswedoinchina.Itsimpolite.wemustbepolite.Pleaselistentothetape,andchoose.
3.（核对答案。）
T:Askthequestion.\"Doyouhaveanybrothersorsisters？\",isitpoliteorimpolite?
S:Polite.
T:Isitpoliteorimpolitetoaskthequestion\"...\"？
S:...
4.（完成4,让学生搭配问题与答案。）
T:Pleasematchthequestionsandanswersin4.
（核对答案。）
T:Pleasereadthequestionsandanswers.
S1a:wheredidyougoonholiday?
S1b:ToAustralia.
S2a:...
S2b:...
（S1a是指第一小组中第1个同学,S2b是第二小组中第2个同学...）
5.（让学生认真观察问句,发现问句的结构及时态。） T:Pleasepayattentiontothequestions.Letsfindtherules.
S:They’repasttense.（帮助学生回答。）
（请学生到黑板上将句式结构补充完整。）
T:Lookandcompletethestructures.
where
why
———
———
———
———
———
（老师在黑板上用汉字标出句式结构要点。）
where
why
How
’
whattime
whom
when
what
特殊疑问句
助动词过去式
动词原形
（让学生朗读3aGrammafocus中的例句加深理解。）
T:Pleasereadthroughthesentencesin3a.
6.（复习3b中的Usefulexpreion。） （
1
）
T:youlikeabook.Andyoullbuyit.youcansay,\"Iwanttobuyabook\".
wantto
T:Doyouknowtheotherwaystoexpre\"wantto\"?
S1:Planto...
S2:Hopeto...
S3:wouldliketo...
wantto
planto
hopeto
wouldliketo
T:Pleasereadthesentencesin3b.
’
whocanmakesentenceswith\"planto\",\"hopeto\"and\"wouldliketo\"?
S1:Iplantoplaybasketballthisafternoon.
S2:Ihopetohaveabirthdayparty.
S3:I’dliketohaveacupoftea.
┆
2）（复习用should给建议。）
T:youshouldn
’thaveacupofteabeforeyougogobed.youshouldgetupearlyinthemorning.wecanuse\"should\"togivesuggestions.Pleasemakesentenceswith\"should\".
S1:youshouldgotoFuzhouforyourholiday.
S2:...
T:Pleasereadthroughthesentencesin3b.
Step5
Project第五步
综合探究活动（时间:9分钟）
.（向学生展示一张有北京风光的明信片。）
T:Now,Ihaveapostcard.Iwanttowriteittomyfriend.AndtellhimIamonholidayinBeijing.Pleasehelpmetowriteit.
2.（让学生在班里朗读自己的postcard。）
T:Pleasereadwhatyouwroteonthepostcard.
S:...
3.（作业,让学生给朋友写一张贺卡,告诉他／她在哪旅游,并做了哪些活动。）
T:Pleasewriteapostcardtoyourfriend.
第20篇：英语七年级上册Leon 2全英教案
2017-2018学年七年级(初一)英语上册 第二讲
Unit 1 Family Leon 1 Photos of Us
Second Period Student: Students of Grade 7 Teaching Content:
1.News words: call, him, run, same, age, as, same...as, sing, dance, live, near, visit 2.International Phonetics. Teaching objectives:
Students will be able to talk about their family members; Students will be able to identify words with the sound /æ/;
Students will be able to read the rhyme without recording.Teaching Methods: The Natural Approach Task-based Teaching Method The Communicative Language Teaching Method Teaching Procedure:
Activity 1: Introduce one of your family members.Say something about him or her, for example, “My mum is 49 years old.She is a cook.” Ask at least 5 students “What about your mum?”
Ask them “How many members are there in your family?” “Who are they?” “What other members do you know?”
Answer the question with, “There are ...in my family.They are...” Do the brainstorm and report in cla. Activity 2.Pronunciation: /æ/
Say “Listen to the rhyme.What sound do you hear the most?” Play the recording the first time, have the students just listen.Go over some words with the sound /æ/, for example, has, at, mat. /æ/发音要领：舌前部稍抬起，舌尖抵下齿。口腔接近全开，上下齿间可容纳食指和中指的宽度，发间时咽喉收缩。
1 .act apple at
2 .sad hat fat bad 3.carry happy family salary
Activity 3.Direct the students to the text on Page 27.Challenge individual students say the words aloud.读句子，注意/æ/的发音。
1 .Is this your handbag? 2. Let the cat out of bag.
3.Jack’s dad has a mad black cat.Catch that mad black cat.
Homework:
1.抄写、背诵本课的单词短语; 2.Exercise 9&10 on P27.
Teaching Reflection: Students are encouraged to talk about their family members.And they made it.They enjoyed the learning proce.
